The User Manual is applicable to FUS-3000Plus Urinalysis Hybrid (hereinafter referred to as the

Analyzer).

Explanation

Dear customers, thanks for purchasing our Urinalysis Hybrid (model: FUS-3000Plus).

Please read the manual carefully before operation as incorrect operation may affect the accuracy and precision of
test results and even cause the damages of the Analyzer or personal injury.

After reading, please reserve the manual properly for reference at any time.

Manufacturer: DIRUI INDUSTRIAL CO., LTD.

Manufacturer Address:

95 Yunhe Street, New & High Tech. Development Zone, Changchun, Jilin 130012, the People’s Republic of China

Production Address:

3333 Yiju Road, New & High Tech. Development Zone Changchun, Jilin 130012, the People’s Republic of China

Place of Production: Changchun, China

Tel.: 400 811 6695 400 811 6605

Website: http://www.dirui.com.cn

E-mail: dirui@dirui.com.cn

Complaints Hotline: 0431-81935326 85177245

Fax: 0431-85173354

Date of Production: See the label.

Service Life: 7 years

Date of Compilation/ Revision: 08-2018.

Caution

● The Analyzer shall be used by professional medical examination personnel or trained doctors, nurses and
inspectors.

● As the Analyzer has biological and chemical risks, the operator shall be trained and use personal protective
appliance to reduce the risk.

● Only trained operators are allowed to conduct dangerous operations, such as moving parts.

● The Analyzer shall be controlled with a special software designated by the company. Installation of other
software or hardware on the computer may affect the normal operation of the Analyzer. Please do not operate
other software during the operation of the Analyzer.

● As the Analyzer may have dust accumulatedon its surface during its long-term storage, its surface shall be
cleaned with a clean soft cloth or gauze gently and a small amount of detergent can be used if necessary. Please
cut off the power supply first before the cleaning of the Analyzer.

● Please do not wipe the surface of the Analyzer with any organic solvent.

● The Analyzer shall be regularly maintained in strict accordance with the manual, or the Analyzer may have
faults or its test precision and accuracy of the Analyzer may be affected.

● Under an environment with low transportation or storage temperature or relative humidity greater than 75%, the
Analyzer shall be turned on for testing only after it is stored in a normal working environment for 24 hours.

● For the usage and storage of relevant QC solution, calibration liquid and focusing solution, please refer to their
manuals.

● The operator is obligated to follow national and local regulations on discharge and treatment of the reagent,
waste liquid, waste sample and consumables.

● Please treat the waste liquid and the consumables of the Analyzer according to regulations about medical waste,
infectious waste and industrial waste.

● Disposable articles shall not be used repeatedly.

Warning

● The protection measures provided for the Analyzer may become invalid if the Analyzer is not used according to
the manual.

● The Analyzer shall be used under a well-grounded condition, independent power supply shall be used and the
input voltage shall meet the requirements of the Analyzer.

● Do not pull or insert the plug with wet hands as it may cause electric shock.

● Do not tread on, warp or pull the wires and cables as they may break and cause a fire.

● Before the power supply for the Analyzer is cut off, no personnel except from the professional maintenance
personnel of the company are allowed to open the rear cover plate and side cover plate.

● If any liquids enter the Analyzer or the internal pipeline has liquid leakage, please turn off the power supply for
the Analyzer immediately and contact the customer service personnel of the company in a timely manner.

● Please use the Analyzer under conditions regulated in the manual. If not, the Analyzer may not operate normally,
the test results may not be reliable, the components of the Analyzer may be damaged and personal injuries may be
caused.

● Please do not use combustible goods around the Analyzer.

● Please set computer software configuration parameters in strict accordance with the manual and do not change
other system settings of the computer arbitrarily.

● The computer shall not be plugged in with a U disk, installed with a third-party software and accessed to an
outer network to prevent being infected by viruses.
Statement

The manufacturer has the final interpretation right of the manual.

The manufacturer declares that it will be responsible for the safety, reliability and performances of the Urinalysis
Hybrid (model: FUS-3000Plus) only if all following requirements are met.

(1)The installation, commissioning and maintenance of the Analyzer are undertaken by professional personnel of
the manufacturer.

(2)Relevant electrical equipment complies with national standards.

(3)The Analyzer is operated according to the manual.

No further notice will be provided in case of any changes to the software interface.
 User Manual

Contents

Chapter 1 Brief introduction .........................................................................................................1-1

1.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.2 Major indicators ............................................................................................................................................. 1-1

1.3 Composition of the Analyzer.......................................................................................................................... 1-4

1.3.1 Front view of the Analyzer ................................................................................................................................................ 1-4
1.3.2 Rear view of the Analyzer ................................................................................................................................................. 1-5

1.4 Test principle ................................................................................................................................................... 1-5

1.4.1 Urinary sediment test principle.......................................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.4.2 Test principle of reagent strip ............................................................................................................................................ 1-6
1.4.3 Turbidity test principle ...................................................................................................................................................... 1-7
1.4.4 Color test principle ............................................................................................................................................................ 1-7
1.4.5 Test principle of refractometer........................................................................................................................................... 1-7
1.4.6 Conductivity test principle ................................................................................................................................................ 1-8

1.5 Symbols ............................................................................................................................................................ 1-8

1.6 Identifications.................................................................................................................................................. 1-9

Chapter 2 Installation of the Analyzer ..........................................................................................2-1

2.1 Environmental conditions for the installation of the Analyzer ................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 Space requirements............................................................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.2 Environmental requirements.............................................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.3 Power requirements ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-1

2.2 Unpacking........................................................................................................................................................ 2-1

2.3 Connection of peripheral equipment ............................................................................................................ 2-2

2.3.1 Connection of the Analyzer ............................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.3.2 Connection of pre-storage tray .......................................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.3.3 Host feet height adjustment ............................................................................................................................................. 2-11
2.3.4 Use of pre-storage tray .................................................................................................................................................... 2-11

2.4 Installation of software ................................................................................................................................. 2-11

2.5 Software uninstallation ................................................................................................................................ 2-14

2.6 Software login................................................................................................................................................ 2-14

2.6.1 Software login ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-14
2.6.2 Log off user ..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-15
2.6.3 Exit system ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2-16

2.7 Window composition .................................................................................................................................... 2-16

Chapter 3 System management .....................................................................................................3-1

3.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................................... 3-1

I
 User Manual

3.2 Dept. information............................................................................................................................................ 3-1

3.3 Doctor information ......................................................................................................................................... 3-2

3.4 Patient type...................................................................................................................................................... 3-3

3.5 Charge type ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-5

3.6 Nationality ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-6

3.7 Sex setting ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-7

3.8 Dilution ratio ................................................................................................................................................... 3-8

3.9 Age information .............................................................................................................................................. 3-9

3.10 The user’s information ............................................................................................................................... 3-10

3.11 Workload statistics ...................................................................................................................................... 3-12

3.12 System diary ................................................................................................................................................ 3-13

Chapter 4 Setting ............................................................................................................................4-1

4.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................................... 4-1

4.2 Analyzer setting............................................................................................................................................... 4-1

4.2.1 Morphology setting ........................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2.2 Chemistry setting............................................................................................................................................................... 4-4
4.2.3 Switch................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-6

4.3 Port................................................................................................................................................................... 4-6

4.4 Printing setting ................................................................................................................................................ 4-8

4.5 Auto send ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-10

4.6 Theme ............................................................................................................................................................ 4-11

4.7 Re-examination rule ..................................................................................................................................... 4-11

4.7.1 Microscopic examination condition ................................................................................................................................ 4-12
4.7.2 Urine culture condition .................................................................................................................................................... 4-12

4.8 Door control settings..................................................................................................................................... 4-13

Chapter 5 Reagent Management ...................................................................................................5-1

5.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................................... 5-1

5.2 Reagent info management .............................................................................................................................. 5-1

5.3 Recharge info management ........................................................................................................................... 5-2

5.4 Reagent consumption statistics ...................................................................................................................... 5-2

5.5 Reagent remaining volume remainding ........................................................................................................ 5-2

Chapter 6 Calibration .....................................................................................................................6-1

II
 User Manual

6.1 Morphology focus ........................................................................................................................................... 6-1

6.2 Morphology calibration.................................................................................................................................. 6-2

6.3 Refractometer module calibration (refractometer module is optional) ..................................................... 6-3

6.3.1 Calibrate refractometer ...................................................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.3.2 Calibrate turbidimeter........................................................................................................................................................ 6-5
6.3.3 Calibrate conductivity ....................................................................................................................................................... 6-6

Chapter 7 Quality control ..............................................................................................................7-1

7.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................................... 7-1

7.2 QC Solution ..................................................................................................................................................... 7-1

7.3 QC setting ........................................................................................................................................................ 7-1

7.4 Morphology QC registration ......................................................................................................................... 7-2

7.4.1 Morphology QC registration ............................................................................................................................................. 7-3
7.4.2 Morphology QC test .......................................................................................................................................................... 7-4

7.5 Chemistry QC registration ............................................................................................................................ 7-4

7.5.1 Chemistry QC registration ................................................................................................................................................. 7-4
7.5.2 Chemistry QC test ............................................................................................................................................................. 7-5

7.6 Morphology QC review .................................................................................................................................. 7-5

7.6.1 Inquire morphology QC .................................................................................................................................................... 7-5
7.6.2 Delete morphology QC result ............................................................................................................................................ 7-8
7.6.3 LIS export.......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-9
7.6.4 View morphology QC chart .............................................................................................................................................. 7-9

7.7 Chemistry QC review ..................................................................................................................................... 7-9

7.8 Morphology QC statistics............................................................................................................................. 7-10

7.8.1 QC chart .......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-11
7.8.2 About QC ........................................................................................................................................................................ 7-12

7.9 Chemistry QC statistics ................................................................................................................................ 7-13

7.10 Standard strip test ...................................................................................................................................... 7-13

7.11 One-key test ................................................................................................................................................. 7-14

Chapter 8 Sample test .....................................................................................................................8-1

8.1 Pre-test preparation........................................................................................................................................ 8-1
8.1.1 Precautions for sample preparation ................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.2 Sample volume .................................................................................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1.3 Tube requirements ............................................................................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1.4 Requirements for use of bar codes..................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.5 Check sheath liquid, waste liquid, reagent strip and printer .............................................................................................. 8-2

8.2 Sample test....................................................................................................................................................... 8-2

8.2.1 Connect power cable and log in the software .................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.2.2 Confirm Analyzer state ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.3 Sample test ........................................................................................................................................................................ 8-4

III
 User Manual

8.2.4 ER registration................................................................................................................................................................... 8-5

8.3 During testing process .................................................................................................................................... 8-6

8.3.1 Edit patient information..................................................................................................................................................... 8-6
8.3.2 Confirm alarm information.............................................................................................................................................. 8-10
8.3.3 Query and export of alarm info ....................................................................................................................................... 8-11
8.3.4 Delete alarm information ................................................................................................................................................. 8-11

8.4 Recheck of sample ........................................................................................................................................ 8-12

8.5 Test results ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-13

8.5.1 Preview test item images ................................................................................................................................................. 8-14
8.5.2 Manual classification of images ...................................................................................................................................... 8-14
8.5.3 Preview of sediment boundary ........................................................................................................................................ 8-15
8.5.4 Descriptions of alarm in test result .................................................................................................................................. 8-16
8.5.5 Modification of test results .............................................................................................................................................. 8-17

8.6 Validation of samples .................................................................................................................................... 8-17

8.7 Preview and printing of report .................................................................................................................... 8-18

8.8 Positioning test .............................................................................................................................................. 8-20

8.9 Deletion of results ......................................................................................................................................... 8-20

8.10 Import from LIS/Send to LIS .................................................................................................................... 8-20

Chapter 9 Data query .....................................................................................................................9-1

9.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................................... 9-1

9.2 Name-based query .......................................................................................................................................... 9-1

9.3 Date-based query ............................................................................................................................................ 9-5

9.4 Sample number-based query ......................................................................................................................... 9-5

9.5 ID number-based query ................................................................................................................................. 9-6

9.6 Case number-based query.............................................................................................................................. 9-6

9.7 Clinical number-based fuzzy query .............................................................................................................. 9-7

Chapter 10 Maintenance of analyzer ..........................................................................................10-1

10.1 Preparation before maintenance of analyzer ........................................................................................... 10-1
10.1.1 Articles and tools ........................................................................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1.2 Detergent ....................................................................................................................................................................... 10-1

10.2 Maintenance of analyzer ............................................................................................................................ 10-1

10.2.1 RESET........................................................................................................................................................................... 10-1
10.2.2 Blank test ....................................................................................................................................................................... 10-2
10.2.3 Empty pipeline .............................................................................................................................................................. 10-3
10.2.4 Fill whole pipeline ......................................................................................................................................................... 10-3
10.2.5 Fill sheath liquid ............................................................................................................................................................ 10-4
10.2.6 Fill detergent ................................................................................................................................................................. 10-4
10.2.7 Clean flow cell .............................................................................................................................................................. 10-4

IV
 User Manual

10.2.8 Clean sheath liquid bottle .............................................................................................................................................. 10-4

10.2.9 Cleanworktable.............................................................................................................................................................. 10-5
10.2.10 Clean refractometer ..................................................................................................................................................... 10-5
10.2.11 Clean pipelines ............................................................................................................................................................ 10-5

10.3 Cleansample-aspirating probe outer wall and waste liquid rinsing bath .............................................. 10-6

10.4 Clean strip table, toothed plate and scraps .............................................................................................. 10-7

10.5 Adjustment of fiber sensor ......................................................................................................................... 10-9

10.6 Clean waste liquid tank ............................................................................................................................ 10-10

10.7 Clean optical fiber sensor mirror ............................................................................................................ 10-10

10.8 Cleanscan window of barcode reader ..................................................................................................... 10-10

10.9 Clean work panel of sample feeding unit and clean counting ball ....................................................... 10-11

10.10 Clean flow cell ......................................................................................................................................... 10-11

10.11 Clean object lens ..................................................................................................................................... 10-12

10.12 Replace sample filter net ........................................................................................................................ 10-13

10.13 Replace desiccant of strip sealed bin ..................................................................................................... 10-15

10.14 Cleanstrip sealed bin .............................................................................................................................. 10-16

10.15 Replaceconsumables ............................................................................................................................... 10-17

10.16 System Information ................................................................................................................................ 10-17

10.17 Database backup and recovery .............................................................................................................. 10-17

10.18 Processing method before stopping analyzer ....................................................................................... 10-20

10.19 Cleaning and maintenance of analyzer ................................................................................................. 10-20

10.20 Treatment of wastes ................................................................................................................................ 10-20

10.21 Processing method for scraping analyzer ............................................................................................. 10-20

Chapter 11 System help ................................................................................................................ 11-1

Chapter 12 Transportation and storage ......................................................................................12-1
12.1 Transport ..................................................................................................................................................... 12-1

12.2 Storage ......................................................................................................................................................... 12-1

Chapter 13 Troubleshooting .........................................................................................................13-1

13.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................................... 13-1

13.2 Faults and troubleshooting ........................................................................................................................ 13-2

Appendix A Processing method for software sleep ..................................................................... A-1

Appendix B FUS-3000Plus Urinalysis Hybrid Host Interface Specification (Serial Port) ..... B-1

V
 User Manual

Appendix C FUS-3000Plus Urinalysis Hybrid Host Interface Specification (Network Interface)

.......................................................................................................................................................... C-1
Appendix D Reagent reference consumption .............................................................................. D-1
Appendix E Letter of Guarantee .................................................................................................. E-1
Appendix F Performance indexes ................................................................................................. F-1
Appendix G Parts List .................................................................................................................. G-1
Appendix H Statements on electromagnetic compatibility ....................................................... H-1

VI
 User Manual

Chapter 1 Brief introduction

1.1 Overview
The Urinalysis Hybrid (model: FUS-3000Plus) can finish routine analysis of urine and sediment analysis and
counting through one-time sampling.
The Analyzer can be used with the urine test strips (product model: FUS-10 II(N), FUS-10 II, FUS-11 II(N),
FUS-11 II, FUS-11MA II(N), FUS-11MA II, FUS-12MA II(N), FUS-12MA II, FUS-13Cr II(N), FUS-13Cr II,
FUS-14Ca II(N), FUS-14Ca II) to finish the routine analysis of urine. Applying high-intensity four-wavelength
cold light source test technology, the Analyzer has long service life, high accuracy, sensitivity, specificity and
stability and can correct the effects to test results brought by pH value, hematuresis and abnormally dyed sample.
Analysis of urinary sediments: The Analyzer can count 25 types of sediments in urine (such as cell, cast and
crystal).
Application range of product: The Urinalysis Hybrid is an in-vitro diagnostic medical device used by professional
personnel to finish the routine analysis of urine and qualitative and quantitative counting of sediments.

1.2 Major indicators

Items Indicators
Sediment testing method Flow type image technology
Normal red blood cell (NRBC), microcyte (MIRBC), acanthoid erythrocyte
(ARBC), erythrocyte ghost (SRBC), other poikilocytes, white blood cell
(WBC), white blood cell cluster (WBCC), squamous epithelial cell (SQEP),
renal tubular epithelial cell (RTEP), transitional epithelial cell (TREP),
Sediment analysis items hyaline cast (HYAL), granular cast (GRAN), waxy cast (WAXY), broad cast
(BROAD), other casts (OCAS), bacillus (BACI), coccus (SUCO),
pseudohypha (HYST), yeast(BYST), calcium oxalate (CAOX), uric acid
crystal (URIC), magnesium ammonium phosphate crystal (MAPH), other
Basic crystals (OCRY), sperm (SPRM) and mucous strands (MUCS).
characteristics Urobilinogen (UBG), bilirubin (BIL), ketone body (KET), blood (BLD),
protein (PRO), nitrite (NIT), leukocyte (LEU), glucose (GLU), pH value
Chemistry analysis items (pH), specific gravity (SG), vitamin C (VC) (optional), microalbumin
(MALB) (optional), creatinine (Cr) (optional) and urinary calcium (Ca)
(optional).
Physical and chemical Specific gravity (SG) (optional), turbidity (optional), color (optional) and
testing items conductivity (optional).
Sediment analysis mode: 120 samples/ hour;
Test speed Chemistry analysis mode: 240 samples/ hour;
Combined sediment+chemistry analysis mode: 120 samples/ hour.
Sample type Urine
Sample volume Min. volume: 3mL non-centrifuged urine; aspirationvolume: about 2.2mL
Chemistry test and Under required environmental temperature condition, the temperature at
pre-heating chemistry test area shall be 25℃-30℃ (optional).
50 samples
Volume of samples to be
tested 270 samples, pre-storage tray module, reclaiming tray module and reclaiming
bridge are optional.
Sample Maximum capacity of strip
200 strips
system sealed bin
Maximum capacity of waste
400 strips
strip bin
Door control function The chemistry test results determine to carry out morphology test or not.
Strip onboard stability 3 days
Emergency treatment
Special position for emergency
function
Sample bar code A built-in bar code reader, automatic scanning of sample bar code;
identification An external bar code reader, manual scanning of bar code (optional).

1-1
 User Manual

Items Indicators
Sediment Light source High-speed light source
optical
system Camera type High-speed photography
Data communication interface: bidirectional RS-232 communication interface
Port
LIS interface: internet access LIS and serial port LIS
Data
system Connection with LIS system Both-way communication with LIS system is supported
Test results storage capacity ≥100,000 data
Host: 82kg
Weight When the host is connected with the pre-storage tray and reclaiming tray
modules and reclaiming bridge: 115kg
Host: 688mm×779mm×584mm
Complete
Dimensions (L×W×H) When the host is connected with the pre-storage tray and reclaiming tray
machine
modules and reclaiming bridge: 1566mm×897mm×584mm
system
Host: 350VA
When the host is connected with the pre-storage tray and reclaiming tray
Power consumption
modules and reclaiming bridge: 355VA
Computer: 400VA (optional)

Normal operating conditions

(1)Environmental temperature: 10℃~30℃;
(2)Relative humidity: not greater than 75%;
(3)Atmospheric pressure: 75kPa~106kPa;
(4)Supply voltage: 100V-240V~ 50/60Hz;
(5)Intensity of light: prevent direct sunlight.
Test items and pictures:

Classifications Abbreviation Sample pictures

Normal red blood cell NRBC

Microcyte MIRBC

Acanthoid erythrocyte ARBC

Erythrocyte ghost SRBC

Other poikilocyte OSRBC

White blood cell WBC

White blood cell cluster WBCC

Squamous epithelial cell SQEP

1-2
 User Manual

Classifications Abbreviation Sample pictures

Renal tubular epithelial cell RTEP

Transitional epithelial cell TREP

Hyaline cast HYAL

Granular cast GRAN

Waxy cast WAXY

Broad cast BROAD

Other casts OCAS

Bacillus BACI

Coccus SUCO

Pseudohypha HYST

Yeast BYST

Calcium oxalate CAOX

Uric acid crystal URIC

Magnesium ammonium phosphate crystal MAPH

Other crystals OCRY

Sperm SPRM

Mucous strands MUCS

Notes:

1-3
 User Manual

● Single particles not in the 25 classifications above are regarded as particles not classified.
● To distinguish and identify the types of crystals and pathologic casts not classified, the operator shall
re-check the image picture, identify the image and confirm the classification manually by operating the
software.

1.3 Composition of the Analyzer

Composition of the Analyzer: the Analyzer is composed of the host, pre-storage tray and reclaiming tray module
(optional) and reclaiming bridge (optional). The host is composed of optical system, mechanical motion system,
fluid tube system, electronic control system and software system.
The optical system is composed of lighting part and high-speed imaging part and outputs image information.
The mechanical motion system is composed of a rack unit, sample feeding unit, probe unit, syringe pump unit,
strip conveying unit, strip selecting unit, refractometer unit and rinse flow cell unit.
The fluid tube system is composed of a syringe pump, solenoid valve, pipeline, flow cell, sheath liquid bottle,
rinse cell and pressure sensor.
The electric control system is composed of a master control circuit board, circuit board of different units and
embeddedsoftware.
The software system is composed of a sample registration module, data inquiry module, quality control module,
system calibration module, system management module, system setting module, system maintenance module and
system monitoring module.
1.3.1 Front view of the Analyzer

1 Alarm lamp 2 Sediment analysis indicator lamp 3 Chemistry analysis indicator lamp
4 Reclaiming tray 5 Reclaiming bridge 6 Pre-storage tray 7 Stop button 8 Start button

Fig. 1-3-1 Front view of the Analyzer (pre-storage tray, reclaiming tray and reclaiming bridge are optional)

1-4
 User Manual

1.3.2 Rear view of the Analyzer

3
11
10
9

4
8
5
6
7

1 Camera cable outlet 2 RS-232 port 3 Embedded handle 4 Detergent port 5 Sheath liquid port
6 Waste liquid port 7 Power vent 8Power socket 9 Waste liquid sensor port
10 Sheath liquid sensor port 11 Detergent sensor port

Fig. 1-3-2 Rear view of the Analyzer

1.4 Test principle

1.4.1 Urinary sediment test principle
The Analyzer applies flow type micro-imaging technology for urinary sediment analysis. The fluid mechanics
system of the Analyzer consists of a specially made flow cell with thin layer structure. After sampling, the sample
will be sent to the flow cell and the syringe pump will promote the sheath liquid used for sediment analysis to
enter flow cell, making the sample wrapped by the sheath liquidused for sediment analysis enter the thin layer
structure of flow cell. Wrapped by the sheath liquidused for sediment analysis, the sample will flow through the
thin layer structure of flow cell at a thickness of a monolayer cell and taken with pictures with a high-speed
camera. The urine sample will be drained to a waste liquid container, as shown in figure below.

Fig. 1-4-1

1-5
 User Manual

The sheath flow technology, high-speed photographytechnology and artificial intelligent recognition technology
used for the Analyzer are described as below.
(1)Sheath flow technology: The sheath liquid, used by the Analyzer for sediment analysis in the testing process, is
isotonic, agranular solution with buffer function. The sheath liquid used for sediment analysis can ensure the
sediment in urine sample solution always flows independently as a single layer. As flow cytometry is applied, it
can be ensured that all sediment will flow in front of the microscope lens and high-speed camera within the focus
of microscope lens and be taken with pictures. Besides, as the urine flows in diffusion, aggregation of sediment
can be effectively prevented.
(2)High-speed photography technology: The urine sample wrapped in the sheath flows to the flow cell and passes
the microscope lens in a form of flat laminar flow. Its thickness and position are just within the focus of
microscope lens. According to the sheath flow type imaging principle, all particles will directly align to the lens in
its maximum section area when they pass the lens. When the field of the microscope is lighted up by light source,
all passing sediment will be instantly shot. In a certain time period, the high-speed camera will take 2500 images
with sediment of all samples. As shown in the figure:

Fig. 1-4-2
(3)Artificial intelligent recognition technology: The automatic sediment recognition software and highly trained
intelligent recognition technology can extract the images of sediment particles quickly and identify and classify
them according to the shape, texture and characteristics in frequency domain of the shot particles. The Analyzer
can classify the particles into 25 classifications: normal red blood cell, microcyte, acanthoid erythrocyte,
erythrocyte ghost, other poikilocytes, WBC, white blood cell cluster, non-squamous epithelial cell, renal tubular
epithelial cell, transitional epithelial cell, hyaline cast, granular cast, waxy cast, broad cast, other casts, bacillus,
coccus, pseudohypha, microzyme, calcium oxalate, uric acid crystal, magnesium ammonium phosphate crystal,
other crystals, sperm and mucous strands.
(4)After the automatic sediment recognition software makes classification, the quantity of images of shot particles
and the volume of scanned urine sample will be used to calculate the concentration of sediment. The result can be
represented by the number contained in per microliter or the number contained in per high power field/ low power
field.
1.4.2 Test principle of reagent strip
The chemistry analysis of the Analyzer applies the principle of photoelectric colorimetry. The content of chemical
components in urine will be determined according to the color change caused by the reaction between the strip
block on strip and the chemical components in urine.
The Analyzer uses four kinds of monochromatic light to scan the modules on the reagent strip one by one and the
optical signal got from the scanning will be converted to electrical signal. After the electrical signal has A/D
conversion, the reflectivity of module can be calculated based on these conversion data. The Analyzer will
determine the content of relevant components in the urine according to the reflectivity.
After automatic sample sending, automatic sample dripping will be carried out according to the volume of sample
required for the reaction of each module on reagent strip. The reagent strip will be conveyed to the position
directly below the detector. After the strip block on reagent strip that has had chemical reaction is irradiated by
light source, its reflected light will be absorbed by the detector. Each strip block has reaction with one chemical
component independently and displays different color. The color shade is in direct proportion to the biochemical
component content in urine sample. Darker the color of strip block after reaction is, greater the absorbed light
value, smaller the reflected light value and smaller the reflectivity will be. Conversely, shallower the color is,

1-6
 User Manual

smaller the absorbed light value, greater the reflected light value and greater the reflectivity will be.
Dual-wavelength testing method is used in application, that is, final test data is obtained according to the ratio of
the reflectivity of strip block when two kinds of light are used. The formula used for calculation is shown below.
Tm  Cr
R
Tr  Cm

Where:
R - Test data of strip block.
Tr - Reflected intensity of strip block to reference light.
Cr - Reflected intensity of white benchmark to reference light.
Cm - Reflected intensity of white benchmark to test light.
Tm - Reflected intensity of strip block to test light.
1.4.3 Turbidity test principle
The light emitted by the luminotron on turbidimeter will pass through the sample and forms an angle of 90
degrees with the incident light to detect how much light is scattered by the particles in the sample. This method
used to measure the scattered light is called scattering method. The urine turbidity can be divided into four grades,
clear, slightly turbid, turbid and seriously turbid.
The formula used for turbidity testing with the scattering method is as follows:
(Ss / Ts - Sw / Tw )
T=
K
Wherein:
T: Turbidity grade
Ss: Urine sample scattered light intensity grade
Ts: Urine sample emitted light intensity grade
Sw: Detergent scattered light intensity grade
Tw: Detergent emitted light intensity grade
K: Coefficient factor
1.4.4 Color test principle
RGB color sensor is used to test the color of sample. Firstly, the white light-emitting diode will irradiate the
sample and after transillumination, the color sensor will test its R, G and B values and then convert them into HSB
through the program, and then the color of the sample will be determined according to the table of calibration.
1.4.5 Test principle of refractometer
The light from the light emitting diode becomes a beam of light through a gap and lensed apparatus and then the
light will pass through a triangular prism slot with urine and radiate the detector. As the refractive index will
change with the urine specific gravity in the triangular prism slot, the light angle related to the dector will also
change.
The formula used for the refractometer method is as follows:
SGX=(SGH-SGL)(KX-KL)/(KH-KL)+SGL
Wherein:
SGX: Specific gravity of sample solution
SGH: Specific gravity of high-concentration solution
SGL: Specific gravity of low-concentration solution
KX: Position coefficient of sample solution
KH: Position coefficient of high-concentration solution

1-7
 User Manual

KL: Position coefficient of low-concentration solution

The specific gravity of sample solution changes with the temperature of urine sample. The specific gravity
changes for 0.001 for every temperature change of 3℃.
1.4.6 Conductivity test principle
Two electrical corrosion-proof conductive contacts are designed for conductivity unit to test the electric
conductivity of electrolyte solution in urine. A temperature sensor is set inside to measure the temperature of
sample between two electrodes.
The formula used for electric conductivity calculation is as follows:
Electric conductivity before temperature compensation: Condnotemp=9.994/R
Electric conductivity after temperature compensation Condtemp
 Cond notemp 1  Temper  11

 (0.0169  Temper  0.5583)
 Cond notemp
 11  Temper  21
 (0.018  Temper  0.5473)
 Cond notemp
 21  Temper
 (0.0189  Temper  0.5281)

Wherein:
Condnotemp: Electric conductivity before temperature compensation
R: Resistance after correction
Condtemp: Electric conductivity after temperature compensation
Temper: Temperature

1.5 Symbols
Table 1-5-1

Symbol Meaning

BIOLOGICAL RISKS

LASER, DANGER SYMBOL

Caution, hot surface

ALTERNATING CURRENT

IN VITRO DIAGNOSTIC MEDICAL DEVICE

BATCH CODE

USE BY

SERIAL NUMBER

1-8
 User Manual

Symbol Meaning

DATE OF MANUFACTURE

MANUFACTURER

THE DEVICE MEETS THE REQUIREMENTS OF DIRECTIVE ON IN VITRO

DIAGNOSTIC MEDICAL DEVICES

AUTHORISED REPRESENTATIVE IN THE EUROPEAN COMMUNITY

The symbol of the crossed out wheeled bin indicates that the product (electrical and electronic
equipment) should not be placed in municipal waste. Please check local regulations for
disposal of electronic products.

CAUTION, REFER TO THE ACCOMPANYING FILES OR MARK DETAILED

WARNING OR MATTERS NEEDING ATTENTION

CATALOGUE NUMBER

"ON" (POWER)

"OFF" (POWER)

PROTECTIVE EARTH

Temperature limit

Humidity limitation

Atmospheric pressure limitation

The symbols above are also applicable to the Analyzer, reagent, QC object and calibration object.

1.6 Identifications

(1)

(2)

1-9
 User Manual

(3)

(4)

(5)

1-10
 User Manual

Chapter 2 Installation of the Analyzer

2.1 Environmental conditions for the installation of the Analyzer

The Analyzer can only be installed after the following space, power and environmental requirements are met. It is
recommended to let professional personnel install the Analyzer. If you plan to install it by yourself, please read the
manual carefully and take appropriate measures.
2.1.1 Space requirements
For the proper maintenance and repair of the Analyzer, following conditions shall be met when the Analyzer is
installed (pre-storage tray not provided).
(1)The distance from the Analyzer at its left and right sides to the wall shall not be shorter than 50cm.
(2)The distance from the rear panel of the Analyzer to the wall shall not be shorter than 50cm and the space for the
installation of waste liquid discharge device shall be ensured.
(3)The distance from the front Analyzer to other instruments shall not be shorter than 100cm.
2.1.2 Environmental requirements
(1)Please put the Analyzer on a stable and flat platform and do not put it with any vibration sources, such as a
centrifuge. The platform shall be able to bear a load of 130kg (if pre-storage tray, reclaiming tray module and
reclaiming bridge are set, the platform shall be able to bear a load of at least 170kg).
(2)Please do not put the Analyzer at a place vulnerable to chemical articles, corrosive gas or strong
electromagnetic interference.
(3)Please do not put the Analyzer at a place exposed to direct sunlight, damp, high or low temperature.
(4)The temperature range of working circumstance of the Analyzer is between 10℃ to 30℃, and the relative
humidity should be no higher than 75%.
(5)Atmospheric pressure: 75kPa~106kPa.
(6)The working environment should be kept well ventilated, and ventilating device should be used if necessary.
But the Analyzer should be protected from direct airflow; otherwise the test accuracy may be affected.
2.1.3 Power requirements
(1)Supply voltage: 100V-240V~ 50/60Hz.
(2)Power consumption: Host 350VA; when the host is connected with the pre-storage tray and reclaiming tray
modules: 355VA; computer 400VA (optional).
Notes:
If the Analyzer selects chemistry for pre-heating, it has power consumption smaller than the rated
maximum power consumption during normal operation because:
● the pre-heating systems do not work continuously after the Analyzer becomes stable. As a result, the
power consumption will decrease.
● the power components of the Analyzer work at different time rather than work simultaneously.
(3)Fuse: F2AL250V 5mm ×20mm.

If the operating environment or power supply of the Analyzer does not meet requirements above, the
accuracy and precision of test results of the Analyzer may be affected, the Analyzer may be damaged or
personal injury may be caused.

2.2 Unpacking
After the arrival of the Analyzer, please carefully check the physical damage of the Analyzer package;if the
package is damaged, please contact the manufacturer or our local agent. If no outer damage is found, please

2-1
 User Manual

unpack following the steps below:

(1)Put the package upright as the arrow indicates.
(2)Open the Analyzer case and accessorycase, and check materials inside based on the packing list;if any goods
missed, please contact the manufacturer or our local agent.
(3)Please check the appearance of the Analyzer; if damaged, please contact the manufacturer immediately.
(4)Keep the Analyzer vertical during carrying and transporting process.
(5)Try to avoid vibration when handling.

2.3 Connection of peripheral equipment

● Before the installation of the sample feeding unit, take down the guard of the sample feeding unit (hold
and uplift the guard of the sample feeding unit with both hands).
● After the installation of the sample feeding unit, remove the wire ties on the host used for fastening the
sample-aspirating probe;otherwise, the Analyzer will not operate.

2.3.1 Connection of the Analyzer

(1)Connection of sample feeding unit
a)Connection of the power cable of sample feeding unit
Put the sample feeding unit in front of the Analyzer and connect the power cable (connector 2) of the sample
feeding unit as shown in the Fig. 2-3-1 (pay attention to the direction of receptacle).

Connector 1
Connector 2

Fig. 2-3-1

b)Connection with computer data cable

Connect sample feeding unit with the data cable of the mainboard (Connector 1) as shown in Fig. 2-3-1 (the
cablenumber of plug and receptacle should be the same and pay attention to the direction of the receptacle).
c)Installation of ground lead
Install the ground lead of the Analyzer to the “ground lead fixing hole” of sample feeding unit, as shown in Fig.
2-3-2.

Ground lead

Ground lead fixing hole

Fig. 2-3-2

2-2
 User Manual

d)Installation of sample feeding unit upper cover plate

Insert the two plugs on the upper cover plate of the sample feeding unit into the receptacles at the left and right
sides as shown in Fig. 2-3-3.

Receptacle at right side

Receptacle at left side

Fig. 2-3-3

(2)Connection of computer
Connect the display, mouse, keyboard and power cable of computer, and connect one end of the
accompanyingcommunication cable (with DB-9 holes at the two ends) to the “RS-232” port (2 in Fig.1-3-2) on
the left rear cover plate of the Analyzer with another end connected to the serial communication port of the
computer host.
(3)Connection of camera communication ports
Connect one end of the accompanying blue communication cable to the camera cable outlet port (1 in Fig.1-3-2)
on the rear cover plate of the Analyzer, with another end connected to the special network port (superior posterior
part of the host, independent network card in standard configuration, as shown in Fig. 2-3-4,) of the computer
host.

Camera communication cable

Fig. 2-3-4

Note:
The computer has two network ports on the back. The independent network card located at upper part is
used for the communication with the Analyzer and the network port on the lower mainboard is used for
LIS system communication.
(4)Connection of sheath liquidlevel sensor and sheath liquid tube
Insert the plug of the accompanyingsheath liquid level sensor into the “Sheath liquid sensor port” (10 in Fig. 1-3-2)
on the right rear cover plate of the Analyzer, with another end placed into sheath liquidtank.

The liquid level sensor and the sheath liquid tube shall be inserted simultaneously. Do not touch with hands
to prevent polluting the sheath liquid and affecting the test value accuracy.
Connect one end of sheath liquid tube in the accompanyingsheath liquid level sensor with the “Sheath liquid port”
(5 in Fig. 1-3-2) on the right rear cover plate of the Analyzer (with another end inserted into sheath liquidtank).

2-3
 User Manual

(5)Connection of waste liquid level sensor and waste liquid tube

Insert the aviation plug of the accompanying waste liquid level sensor into the “Waste liquid sensor port” (9 in Fig.
1-3-2) on the right rear cover plate of the Analyzer, with another end plugged into waste tank (the liquid sensor
and waste tube should be plugged at the same time).
Connect one end of waste liquid tube in the accompanying waste liquid level sensor with the “Waste liquid port”
(6 in Fig. 1-3-2) on the right rear cover plate of the Analyzer (with another end inserted into waste liquid tank).

The height difference between the waste liquid tank and the Analyzer shall be greater than 0.5m.
(6)Connection of printer
Please correctly connect printer with the USB cable of the computer host and check:
a)Whether the printer driver is installed.
b)The type of printing paper.
(7)The installation of external bar code reader
Connect another end of accompanying bar code reader with the “USB” port on the computer host.

The bar code reader will emit light harmful to people’s eyes;please do not look straight at the light when the
Analyzer is working.
(8)Connection of power cable
Insert one end of power cable into 8 in Fig. 1-3-2, with another end connected with receptacle to ensure reliable
grounding.

● The receptacle connected with the power cable shall be reliably grounded.
● The receptacle connected with power cable shall be placed near the Analyzer and easily disconnected.
● To ensure the reliable operation of the Analyzer, sharing the same receptacle with high-power electrical
appliances (such as air conditioner, refrigerator and oven) should be avoided.

2.3.2 Connection of pre-storage tray

(1)Removal of sample feeding unitcover plate
Remove the sample feedingunit cover plate from the sample feeding unit of the Analyzer first, and then remove
the four screws used for fastening the stop blocks on both sides and remove the stop block at the side of sample
feeding unit cover plate, as shown in Fig. 2-3-5 and 2-3-6.

Sample feeding unit

cover plate

Fig. 2-3-5

2-4
 User Manual

Screw (sample feeding unit cover plate)

Fig. 2-3-6

(2)Installation of pre-storage tray connection block

Pull the connection block (pin part) on the pre-storage tray in the direction indicated in the figure below, as shown
in the figure below.

Connection block
(pin part)

Connection block
(slot part)

Connection block
(pin part)

Connection block
(pin part)

Fig. 2-3-7

Remove the screws on connection block (pin part) and install the connection block (pin part) at the mounting hole

2-5
 User Manual

at the right side of sample feeding unit of the Analyzer, and tighten the screws, as shown in figure below.

Connection block
Location pin

Connection block Screws

(pin part)
Connection block
Screws (pin part)

Fig. 2-3-8

(3)Connection of pre-storage tray and sample feeding unit

Insert the communication cable on pre-storage tray into the receptacle of sample feeding unit of the Analyzer, as
shown in Fig. 2-3-9 and 2-3-10.

Communication cable
Communication cable

Communication cable
receptacle

Fig. 2-3-9

Connect the connection block (slot part) on the pre-storage tray with the connection block (pin part) of the sample
feeding unit of the Analyzer, as shown in the figure below.

Connection block
locating pin

Connection block
(pin part)

Communication cable
Communication
cable receptacle
Pre-storage tray

Fig. 2-3-10

(4)Installation of reclaiming bridge connection block

Pull out the connection block (slot part) on the reclaiming bridge and take down the screws, as shown in Fig.

2-6
 User Manual

2-3-11. And then install the connection block (slot part) at the mounting hole at the left side of sample feeding unit
of the Analyzer, and tighten the screws, as shown in figure below.

Screws
Communication cable

Connection block
Connection block locating pin
(Slot part)

Reclaiming bridge

Fig. 2-3-11

Screws

Fig. 2-3-12

(5)Connection of sample feeding unit and reclaiming bridge

Insert the communication cable on reclaiming bridge into the receptacle of sample feeding unit of the Analyzer, as
shown in the figure below.

Communication
cable
Communication cable
Communication
cable receptacle

Fig. 2-3-13

And then connect the connection block (pin part) with the connection block (slot part) of the sample feeding unit
of the Analyzer, as shown in the figure below.

2-7
 User Manual

Connection block
locating pin

Sample
feeding unit

Reclaiming
bridge Connection block
(slot part)

Communication
cable
Communication
cable receptacle

Fig. 2-3-14
(6)Connection of reclaiming tray and reclaiming bridge
Pull the connection block (pin part) of the reclaiming tray in the direction indicated in the figure below.

Connection
Reclaiming
block
tray

Connection Connection
block block
(pin part) (pin part)

Fig. 2-3-15

Remove the guard of the reclaiming bridge and install the connection block (pin part) on the reclaiming tray to the
mounting hole at the left side of reclaiming bridge, and then tighten the screws, as shown in figure below.

Screws

Fig. 2-3-16

Remove the guard of the reclaiming tray and insert the communication cable on reclaiming tray into the receptacle
of reclaiming bridge, as shown in the figure below.

2-8
 User Manual

Communication cable
Communication cable

Communication
cable receptacle

Fig. 2-3-17

And then connect the connection block (slot part) on the reclaiming tray with the connection block (pin part) of
the reclaiming bridge, as shown in the figure below.

Connection block
locating pin

Screws
Reclaiming tray

Connection block
(pin part)

Communication cable

Communication
cable receptacle

Fig. 2-3-18

Reassemble the guard of the pre-storage tray, reclaiming tray, reclaiming bridge and the sample feeding unit of the
Analyzer.
(7)The figure below shows the pre-storage tray, reclaiming tray module and reclaiming bridge device after
installation.

Reclaiming tray Reclaiming bridge FUS-3000Plus Urinalysis Hybrid Pre-storage tray

Fig. 2-3-19

(8)Testing after the installation of pre-storage tray, reclaiming tray module and reclaiming bridge device
Put a test tube rack on the pre-storage tray and push it to the reclaiming tray through pre-storage tray, sample
feeding unit and reclaiming bridge. In the process, the test tube rack shall be smoothly conveyed without

2-9
 User Manual

stagnation.
In case of stagnation, please take down the guard of the reclaiming bridge (or pre-storage tray or reclaiming tray)
at the stagnation, loosen the screws (as shown in Fig. 2-3-20, 2-3-21 and 2-3-22) fastening the connection block
and adjust the position of the reclaiming bridge (or pre-storage tray or reclaiming tray) forwards or backwards
until the test tube is smoothly conveyed, and then re-install the guard of the reclaiming bridge (or pre-storage tray
or reclaiming tray). Until now the installation of the pre-storage tray is finished.

Screws
Screws

Fig. 2-3-20

Screws

Fig. 2-3-21

Screws

Fig. 2-3-22

2-10
 User Manual

2.3.3 Host feet height adjustment

Right door

2-3mm

Sample feeder

Right front

Fig. 2-3-23

Rotate the right front foot of the host to make the gap between the right door and the sample feeding unit is
2mm~3mm.

Left door

2-3mm

Sample feeder

Left front foot

Fig. 2-3-24

Rotate the left front foot of the host to make the gap between the left door and the sample feeding unit is
2mm~3mm.
2.3.4 Use of pre-storage tray
After installing the pre-storage tray, reclaiming tray and reclaiming bridge, turn on the power switch on
pre-storage tray and reclaiming tray by pushing it to “|”. And then, enter the System setting→Port setting interface
of the urine analyzer software, tick Use pre-storage tray and click the Use at the lower right corner. After
re-starting the software according to prompts, put the sample to be tested on the pre-storage tray in one time and
execute sample testing.

2.4 Installation of software

● SQL database should be installed first before application software of Analyzer.

● SQL Server 2005 or superior versions are recommended, and our company will not provide database.

2-11
 User Manual

Analyzer online software should be installed by our specialized personnel; if no abnormal situation occurs, user is
not allowed to uninstall the software. If software re-installation or uninstallation is needed, please follow the steps
below:
Put the installation disc of Analyzer application software in CD driver, and run the setup.exe file, then the
installation program starts running and the interface is as shown below:

Fig. 2-4-1

After inputting correct installation password (installation password is provided by the manufacturer), click
and the interface is as shown below:

Fig. 2-4-2

2-12
 User Manual

Click on the interface (Fig. 2-4-2) directly, and the interface as shown in the figure will be
displayed.

Fig. 2-4-3

Select the language when the program is operating from theinterface (Fig. 2-4-3) and then click to
start installation, and the interface is as shown below:

Fig. 2-4-4

Wait until software installation is completed.

2-13
 User Manual

2.5 Software uninstallation

To delete the analyzer application software from the computer, please enter the “Add or delete program”/
“Program and functions” in control panel and select “FUS-3000Plus”. After clicking “Uninstall”, an “Add or
delete program” confirmation window will appear, and the interface is as shown below:

Fig. 2-5-1

Click to finish the uninstallation of the software.

2.6 Software login

Turn on the power switch of the Analyzer first and then log in the application software.

2.6.1 Software login

After the software installation, double-click the icon of Analyzer application software (hereinafter
referred to as the software), or find the software on the“Program” window and click “Start” to enter the “System
login” window, and the interface is as shown below:

Fig. 2-6-1

Input the user name and password, the initial user name of Analyzer is Admin, and the initial password is 1.If
wrong user name and password are input, login failure will appear, and the interface is as shown below:

2-14
 User Manual

Fig. 2-6-2

If the error repeats for 3 times, the software will show “Login failure for three times!”. Click the
button in the prompt box, and the program will automatically exit.

Input correct user name and password in the login window (Fig. 2-6-1), and click or Enter to enter
the main window of the software, and the interface is as shown below:

Fig. 2-6-3

2.6.2 Log off user

Click in the main key area on the interface (Fig. 2-6-3), and the interface is as shown below:

Fig. 2-6-4

Click in the prompt box to go back to the login interface (Fig. 2-6-1) to switch user.

2-15
 User Manual

2.6.3 Exit system

Under the standby mode, click in the main key area to enter the shutdown dialog box interface, as
shown in the figure.

Fig. 2-6-5

Click the button to rinse the Analyzer and exit; click the button to exit the system; click

the button to restart the analyzer; click the button to close the shutdown window and go
back to the original interface.

● If the operator is to leave the Analyzer for a long time, it is recommended to log off the software to
prevent information modification.Users are recommended to back up the database regularly in case of
accidental data loss.
● After the initial user name and password are input and first-time login is finished, set the user name,

password and access right in of for next login.

● When executing shutdown, it’s recommended to use “ ”.

2.7 Window composition

(1)Main key area
Click with mouse, then the color of selected module will change, and the interface is as shown below:

Fig. 2-7-1

Among them, “ ” is an alarm icon. When alarm occurs, the alarm icon will appear at the right side of main
key area. Operator can click the icon to enter the alarm information window and check the content and solutions.
The icon will disappear when alarm information is deleted, and will not appear again until the next alarm occurs.
(2)State bar
It is located at the bottom of the screen, and the interface is shown in Fig. 2-7-2 below.

2-16
 User Manual

Fig. 2-7-2

: Analyzer state, real-time display of all state of the Analyzer, including standby mode,
sample test, shutdown, sample preparation and etc.

: Communication state, real-time display of communication state of the Analyzer,

including image and data preparation, sample analysis, etc.

: Show the current user name and authority of the software; user can add or delete on tab
“User information” of the “Management” window.

: Show the system time of the computer.

: Display the communication status between the Analyzer and online software in
real time.

: Display the communication status between the Analyzer and LIS system in real time.

: Show the system time of the computer.

(3)Working section
When choosing function, the interface of corresponding function will be shown, for example, click “Monitor”in
the main key area, and the interface is as shown below:

Fig. 2-7-3

● After the program is installed for the first time, the strip type is FUS-12MA by default.
● If the program is not installed for the first time, the type set before the program uninstallation will be
displayed.If the strip type is set as FUS-14Ca before software uninstallation, the strip type will be displayed
as FUS-14Ca when logging in after re-installation or under standby mode after turn-on and resetting.

2-17
User Manual

2-18
 User Manual

Chapter 3 System management

3.1 Overview
The user can make following settings in “Management”: dept. information, doctor information, patient type,
gender, dilution multiple, age information, user information, workload statistics, statistics journal.

● Only users with administrator rights can run the system management interface.
● All tabs can only be set under standby mode.

3.2 Dept. information

Click in the software main key area, then click and the interface is as shown
below:

Fig. 3-2-1
(1)Add dept. information
Input serial number of dept. to be added in the input box following “Order”, mnemonic of dept. to be added in the
input box following “Mnemonic” and dept. name to be added in the input box following “Dept Name”, and click
to add them tothe dept. information list.
(2)Modification of dept. information
Select the item to be modified fromthe dept. information list, input the modified content in input box on the right
side of corresponding item, click and a dialog box as shown below will pop up:

Fig. 3-2-2

3-1
 User Manual

Click in the figure above to save the modified content; click to reserve the original
content.
(3)Delete dept. information

Select the item to be deleted fromthe dept. information list, click and a dialog box as shown below
will pop up:

Fig. 3-2-3

Click to delete the selected item; click to reserve the settings.

3.3 Doctor information

Click on the interface (Fig. 3-2-1), and the interface is as shown below:

Fig. 3-3-1

(1)Add doctor information

Input serial number of doctor to be added in the input box following “Order”, mnemonic of doctor to be added in
the input box following “Mnemonic” and doctor name to be added in the input box following “Doctor”, and click
to add them tothe doctor information list.
(2)Modification of doctor information
Select the item to be modified fromthe doctor information list, input the modified content in input box on the right
side of corresponding item, click and a dialog box as shown below will pop up:

3-2
 User Manual

Fig. 3-3-2

Click to save the modified content; click to reserve the original content.
(3)Delete doctor information

Select the item to be deleted fromthe doctor information list, click and a dialog box as shown below
will pop up:

Fig. 3-3-3

Click to delete the selected item; click to reserve the settings.

Notes:
If dept. is not input or corresponding dept. is not selected before adding doctor information, a dialog box as
shown below will pop up, prompting that the operator shall add the dept. information first.

Fig. 3-3-4

3.4 Patient type

Click tag in Fig. 3-3-1, and the interface is as shown below:

3-3
 User Manual

Fig. 3-4-1

(1)Add patient type

Input serial number of patient type to be added in the input box following “Order”, mnemonic of patient type to be
added in the input box following “Mnemonic” and patient type to be added in the input box following “Patient
Type”, and click to add them tothe patient type list.
(2)Modification of patient type
Select the item to be modified from the patient type list, input the modified content in input box on the right side
of corresponding item, click and a dialog box as shown below will pop up:

Fig. 3-4-2

Click to save the modified content; click to reserve the original content.
(3)Delete patient type

Select the item to be deleted fromthe patient type list, click and a dialog box as shown below will pop
up:

Fig. 3-4-3

Click to delete the selected item; click to reserve the settings.

3-4
 User Manual

3.5 Charge type

Click on the interface (Fig. 3-4-1), and the interface is as shown below:

Fig. 3-5-1

(1)Addition
Input serial number of charge type to be added in the input box following “Order”, mnemonic of charge type to be
added in the input box following “Mnemonic” and charge type to be added in the input box following “Charge
type”, and click to add them tothe sex list.
(2)Modification
Select the item to be modified fromthe charge type list, input the modified content in input box on the right side of
corresponding item, click and a dialog box as shown below will pop up:

Fig. 3-5-2

Click “ ” to save the modified content; click “ ” to reserve the original content.
(3)Deletion

Select the item to be deleted fromthe charge type list, click “ ” and a dialog box as shown below will pop
up:

3-5
 User Manual

Fig. 3-5-3

3.6 Nationality

On Figure 3-5-1 click ，and the interface is as shown below:

Fig. 3-6-1
(1)Add nationality
Input the serial number of the added nationality in the input box of “Order”. Input the mnemonic of the added
nationality in the input box of “Mnemonic”, input the nationality in the input box of “Nationality”, and click
. The added content will enter the nationality list.
(2)Modify nationality
Select the item to be modified from the nationality list, input the modified content in the input box of the
corresponding item on the right, and click . Then the following dialog pops up:

Fig. 3-6-2

Click to save the modified content; click to keep the original content.
(3)Delete nationality

3-6
 User Manual

Select the item to be deleted from the nationality list, and click . Then the following dialog pops up:

Fig. 3-6-3

Click to delete the selected item; click to keep the settings.

3.7 Sex setting

Click on the interface (Fig. 3-6-1), and the interface as shownwill be displayed.

Fig. 3-7-1

(1)Addition
Input the serial number of the sex to be added in the input box following “Order”, mnemonic of sex to be added in
the input box following “Mnemonic” and sex to be added in the input box following “Sex”, and click to
add them to the sex list.
In case of any repeated input of the serial number, mnemonic or sex, the corresponding dialog box will pop up and
corresponding information shall be input correctly according to the requirements of remarks.
(2)Modification
Select the item to be modified from the sex information list, input the modified content in the input box on the right
side of the corresponding item, click and a dialog box as shownbelow will pop up:

3-7
 User Manual

Fig.3-7-2

Click to save the modified content; click to keep the original content.
(3)Deletion

Select the item to be deleted from the sex information list, click and a dialog box as shownbelow will
pop up:

Fig.3-7-3

Click to delete the selected item; click to keep the settings.

3.8 Dilution ratio

Click on the interface (Fig. 3-7-1), and the interface is as shown below:

Fig. 3-8-1

(1)Setting
Input serial number of dilution ratio to be added in the input box following “Order”, mnemonic of dilution ratio to

3-8
 User Manual

be added in the input box following “Mnemonic” and dilution ratio to be added in the input box following
“Dilution Times”, and click to add them tothe dilution ratio list.
(2)Modification
Select the item to be modified fromthe dilution ratio list, input the modified content in input box on the right side
of corresponding item, click and a dialog box as shown below will pop up:

Fig. 3-8-2

Click to save the modified content; click to reserve the original content.
(3)Deletion

Select the item to be deleted fromthe dilution ratio list, click and a dialog box as shown below will
pop up:

Fig. 3-8-3

Click to delete the selected item; click to reserve the settings.

3.9 Age information

Click on the interface (Fig. 3-8-1), and the interface is as shown below:

3-9
 User Manual

Fig. 3-9-1

(1)Add age information

Input serial number of age information to be added in the input box following “Order”, mnemonic of age
information to be added in the input box following “Mnemonic” and age information to be added in the input box
following “Unit”, and click to add them tothe age information list.
In case of any repeated input of serial number, mnemonic or unit, corresponding dialog box will pop up and
corresponding information shall be input correctly according to the requirements of remarks.
(2)Modify age info unit
Select the item to be modified fromthe age information list, input modified content in the input box following
corresponding item on the right, click , and a dialog box as shown in Fig. 3-8-2 will pop up. Click
to save the modified content; click to reserve the original content.
(3)Delete age information

Select the item to be deleted fromthe age information list, click and a dialog box as shown below will
pop up:

Fig. 3-9-2

Click to delete the selected item; click to reserve the settings.

3.10 The user’s information

Click on the interface (Fig. 3-9-1), and the interface is as shown below:

3-10
 User Manual

Fig. 3-10-1

(1)Add new user

Click on the interface (Fig. 3-10-1), and a dialog box as shown below will pop up:

Fig. 3-10-2

The name of new operator, authority and password can be set on the interface.
Input the name of operator (exclude symbols like “[” (left square bracket), “]” (right square bracket), “‘” (single
quote) or figures) in the input box under “Operator name”, input operator ID and mnemonic (cannot be brackets,
punctuations and special symbols), select operator permission (admin, operator, viewer) and input password
(passwords input twice must be consistent). Click to add a new user.
(2)Delete user

Select the operator to be deleted on the interface (Fig. 3-8-1), click and a dialog box as shown below
will pop up:

3-11
 User Manual

Fig. 3-10-3

Click to delete the selected operator; click to reserve the user.

The default administrator in Analyzer can delete other users but not own account.
(3)Modify user information
To modify any information of existing operators, delete the operator information from the list first and then add
information according to new information. (For example, change the password)

3.11 Workload statistics

Click on the interface (Fig. 3-10-1), and the interface is as shown below:

Fig. 3-11-1

Correctly select statistical items (such as department, sending doctor, testing doctor, total samples) and test mode,
select start date and end date, click to count workloads in different time slots and display
the statistical results in chart (3D or plane).

If the print template is imported, click on the interface (Fig. 3-11-1) to preview and print the
statistical table and the interface is as shown below:

3-12
 User Manual

Fig. 3-11-2

If the print template is not imported, a promptindicating “Print template importing failure” will pop up.

3.12 System diary

Click on the interface (Fig. 3-11-1), and the interface is as shown below:

Fig. 3-12-1

(1)Login diary
a)Recent 50

Select “Recent 50” as shown in Fig. 3-12-1 under display condition, click and recent 50 login

diaries are displayed on the right side of the screen. Click and a dialog box as shown below will
pop up:

3-13
 User Manual

Fig. 3-12-2

Click to clear displayed diaries.

b)Diary within selected time slot:
Click “Recent 50” again to cancel the option, select the start date fromthe pull-down menu following above

time and end date fromthe pull-down menu behind following time, click and login diaries within

selected time slot are displayed on the right of the screen. Click to clear the diaries within selected
time slot.
(2)Alarm diary view is the same as the operation of “Login diary”.
(3)Diary export

Click “ ”. The prompt box of selecting a path pops up. The user can select and save a path.
Click to save successfully.

Fig. 3-12-3

3-14
 User Manual

Chapter 4 Setting

4.1 Overview
“Setting” can realize some general definitions of the software system.

“Reagent strip registration” and “Theme setup” can be set by ordinary users, but other items must be set
by users with administrator authority.

4.2 Analyzer setting

Click in the software main key area, then click and the interface is as shown
below:

Fig. 4-2-1

4.2.1 Morphology setting

(1)Edit particle information
Select the item to be edited fromthe list box of the interface (Fig. 4-2-1) and double-click it and the interface is as
shown below:

4-1
 User Manual

Fig. 4-2-2

Input the abbreviation (it can be text or figures) of the item in print report in the input box following the “Abbr”.
Input the name (it can be text or figures) of the item in the input box following “Name”.
Select common unit from radio buttons following the “Unit”.
If the item is graded, select from radio buttons in front of “Level” and the interface is as shown below:

Fig. 4-2-3

Select level from “Reference Range”on the interface shown above. When the test result equals to or is above
selected level, there will be abnormal value marks such as H, ↑ or *, and if “No threshold” is selected, there will
be no abnormal value marks for a test result.

After correct selection, click on the interface (Fig. 4-2-3) to complete the settings.

Click and a dialog box as shown in Fig. 4-2-4 will pop up to modify the unit.

4-2
 User Manual

Fig. 4-2-4

Click to resume the default.

Click or to edit other test item information.

(2)Edit level

Click on the interface (Fig. 4-2-3) to display sediment graded setting interface as shown in Fig.
4-2-5.

Fig. 4-2-5

a)Modify level:
Select the level to be modified, and the grade value is displayed in the edit box below, input new level value in
the box and click “ ” to save the modified information.
b)Delete level:

Select the level to be deleted, click and a dialog box as shown below will pop up:

Fig. 4-2-6

4-3
 User Manual

Click to delete the selected level; click to reserve the original settings.
c)Add level:

Input new level in the edit box of the interface (Fig. 4-2-5), click to add a new level tothe list.
d)Save modified result:

When all modifications of a certain item are completed, click and then click to close
the settings. Modified results will be displayed on the interface of “Sediment setting”.
(3)Results decimal places

Select results decimal places from the pull-down menu of at bottom left of the
“Morphology setting”on the interface (Fig. 4-2-1).
4.2.2 Chemistry setting
Edit unit system of chemistry part, strip type, critical value, negative representation and physical index detection
in chemistry setting of the interface (Fig. 4-2-1).
(1)Unit system setting:
There are international, conventional and symbol unit systems. When the symbol unit system is ticked, the tested
chemistry result will include a symbol and when it is not ticked, the result will not include the symbol.
(2)Negative representation mode:
Negative can be displayed as Neg or -.
(3)Physical index detection:
The refractometer is optional. If the Analyzer is configured with a refractometer, tick the refractometer,
colorimeter and turbidimeter.
(4)Strip type:
Log in the software by any identity and the strip type, including 10-item, 11-item (VC), 11-item (MALB), 12-item,
13-item and 14-item, will be displayed on the interface and the user can change it according to the demand for
strip.
(5)Critical value:
To tick abnormal marks, when a certain chemistry result exceeds the set critical value, the item will be marked
with an abnormal mark “*”.
(6)Edit the symbol

a)Click and a window as shown below will pop up:

4-4
 User Manual

Fig. 4-2-7

b)Select a certain inspection item such as UBG, and double-click the column value displayed in the symbol
system such as 3+. The value can be modified, i.e. 3+ is displayed in the brackets. After 3+ is modified into
+++, click , and a prompt box as shown below will pop up:

Fig. 4-2-8

Click in Fig. 4-2-8 and close windows shown in Fig. 4-2-7 and Fig. 4-2-8 simultaneously to go
back to the Analyzer setting interface. Go to the symbol editing page again, and corresponding symbol system
of UBG>=135 is +++, i.e. edited symbol is saved. Then the symbol of chemistry testing result on thework list
and UBG item on thechemistry QC chart is changed from 3+ into +++. As shown in the figure:

Fig. 4-2-9

If is clicked after a certain symbol is edited, the edited symbol will not be saved and the default will
be displayed when you go to the symbol editing page again; click and a dialog box as shown
below will pop up:

4-5
 User Manual

Fig. 4-2-10

Click and all edited symbols are restored to defaults; click , and defaults will not be
restored.
4.2.3 Switch
Edit instrument switch, built-in bar code reader and alarm sound switch in the switch settings of the interface (Fig.
4-2-1).
(1)Instrument switch
Morphology out of service: when “Morphology out of service” is ticked, test for morphology is not available for
Analyzer;
Chemistry out of service: when “Chemistry out of service” is ticked, test for chemistry items is not available for
analyzer;
Physical index detection: the refractometer is optional. If the Analyzer is configured with a refractometer, tick the
item.
(2)Built-in bar code reader:
Set the switch of bar code reader in select box of built-in bar code reader on the interface (Fig. 4-2-1); set the
switch off if the user does not use a built-in bar code reader to scan the bar code.
(3)Alarm sound:

In case of an alarm at the Analyzer, alarm icon flickers. If an alarm sound is also needed to be given by the
buzzer, radio button “On” of alarm sound on the interface (Fig. 4-2-1) shall be selected. Thus double tips will be
given in case of an alarm at the Analyzer. Alarm can be set for the test item via the Analyzer.

4.3 Port
If the Analyzer and other LIS systems are networked, it is required to realize LIS communication setting on the

interface.

Click and the interface is as shown below:

4-6
 User Manual

Fig. 4-3-1

(1)LIS communication
By network:
Select “LIS Enable” and “Network” simultaneously on the interface (Fig. 4-3-1) as shown below:

Fig. 4-3-2

IP address: refers to IP address of server in LIS system.

Port No.: refer to port number of server in LIS system.
By serial port:
Select “LIS Enable” and “Serial Port” simultaneously on the interface (Fig. 4-3-1) as shown below:

Fig. 4-3-3

Serial port No.: select the communication serial port number, and the user shall set it according to actual situation.
Data position, stop position and parity are default values which cannot be modified by the user; baud rate can be

4-7
 User Manual

modified by the user.

Notes:
LIS terminal shall support communication protocol of the Analyzer.
(2)Communication with the Analyzer
The user can select the serial port according to the actual condition and the baud rate, data position, stop position
and parity are default values which cannot be modified by the user.
(3)Disposal in case of bar code scanning failure
If bar code is unclearly printed or pasted not in line with the requirements, scanning may fail; if “Skip sample
when bar code scan failed” is selected, when bar code scanning fails, test is not available for the sample.
(4)Use pre-storage tray (optional)
If the Analyzer is equipped with a pre-storage tray and reclaiming tray module, tick to use the pre-storage tray.

After the settings are completed, click at the lower right corner of the screen, and a dialog box as
shown below will pop up:

Fig. 4-3-4

Click to save the setting, or click to close the setting.

If “Skip sample when bar code scan failed” options are set, the settings can only take effect after the
software is restarted.

4.4 Printing setting

Click and the interface is as shown below:

Fig. 4-4-1

4-8
 User Manual

(1)Page setting
Input the hospital name in the input box below “Hospital” and the name will be displayed at the title of the report.
Input specific information in the input box under “Page Footer” and the information can be displayed at the footer
of the report.

After the input, click and a dialog box as shown below will pop up:

Fig. 4-4-2

Click to save the input content.

(2)Select the print type
Before printing, select the print type from the pull-down menu following “Report type”. “Specimen report”,
“Workload statistics”, “Morphology QC report”, “Urine sediment QC statistical chart”, “Chemistry QC”, “Multi
QC chart”, “Multi QC report”, “Calibration report”, “Focusing report “, “Turbidity test report”, “SG test report”,
“Calibration strip test report”, “Blank test report” can be printed.
(3)Set print format

Select a print format fromthe print type list, click , and then “＊” will appear in the
corresponding column of whether to start using in the template.
(4)Preview the print report
Click the line of the list to be printed on the left side, and the report format is displayed on the right side of the
screen and the interface is displayed as shown in Fig. 4-4-1. Click “All” of the print list on the left and choose the
line of “A4_12.fr3” to review all test mode records, and the interface is displayed as shown below:

Fig. 4-4-3

No test results are displayed during preview and after the test, specific test items, HPF and LPF report items will
be displayed.
(5)Select abnormal value mark

4-9
 User Manual

There radio buttons are available for the abnormal value mark, i.e. *, H and ↑. Select a common mark and when
the test result exceeds the reference range, the test result will be suffixed with an abnormal value mark. When the
Urine calcium (Ca) and creatinine (Cr) in chemistry testing results are minimum, i.e. KET>0.15, the abnormal
value mark is displayed as “*” shown below:

Fig. 4-4-4

(6)Auto print
Tick the item and the report will be automatically printed after the test.

4.5 Auto send

Select the corresponding sending terminal and auto send can automatically send the software test result to the

terminal. Click and the interface is as shown below:

Fig. 4-5-1

(1)When “LIS system” is selected, the test results can be sent to LIS system after the test (LIS system can send out
the information via “Barcode” or “Sample No.”, and when the “Barcode” is selected, “Automatically query
patient information from LIS during testing” can be ticked).

(2)When option “Auto send valid” is selected, i.e. , the test results will be automatically sent
to LIS system after the test. When “Only allowed to send automated audit sample” is selected, only the test results
of samples passing the audit can be automatically sent to LIS system.
(3)If “Automatic validate” is selected, after the test items of auto send are selected and corresponding threshold
value is set, when any item of the test result is equal to or above the set threshold value, the test results cannot be

4-10
 User Manual

automatically sent. Only when all items of the test results are below the set threshold value, can the results be
automatically sent to the set terminal.

After the setting, click and a dialog box as shown below will pop up:

Fig. 4-5-2

Click to save the setting.

After the setting is completed, click on the interface of and input the sample
number or bar code information to send LIS data.

4.6 Theme

Click and the interface is as shown below:

Fig. 4-6-1

Select the language of software system, the interface varies along and the languages available include Chinese and
English.

4.7 Re-examination rule

Click and the interface is as shown below:

4-11
 User Manual

Fig. 4-7-1

4.7.1 Microscopic examination condition

(1)Addition:
Choose the microscopic examination condition from the list on the left. CAST item can be selected separately or
in combined manner with PRO and other items must be the combination of chemistry items (BLD and LEU) and
sediment items (RBC and WBC). If “WBC positive” and “LEU positive” are selected as the microscopic
examination conditions, click , selected microscopic examination conditions are added tothe list. After the
Analyzer test, if the chemistry results and sediment results meet the set microscopic examination conditions, the
lines of sample results in the list are displayed in yellow, reminding that manual examination by microscope is
required for recheck.
(2)Modification:
Click the lines of microscopic examination conditions in the list box, then re-choose the microscopic examination
conditions on the left and click to modify the set microscopic examination conditions.
(3)Clearing:

In case of an error found during the selection of microscopic examination conditions, click at any time to
re-choose the conditions.
(4)Deletion:
If the set microscopic examination conditions are not necessary, the conditions can be deleted. Click the lines of
microscopic examination conditions in the list box, and then click to delete them.

After the microscopic examination conditions are deleted, no color mark reminding that manual
examination by microscope is required for recheck is provided regardless of the test results.

4.7.2 Urine culture condition

Urinary tract infection (UTI) is caused by the direct invasion of bacteria (very little infection can be caused by
fungi, protozoa, viruses). UTI is divided into upper UTI and lower UTI, upper UTI refers to pyelonephritis and
lower UTI includes urethritis and cystitis. Pyelonephritis is divided into acute pyelonephritis and chronic
pyelonephritis, which is commonly found in female, and RBC, WBC or protein can be found in urine routine
examination, so Urinalysis Hybridcan provide a rapid screening report for UTI. If UTI instructional conditions
(see Table 4-7-1) are met, urine culture inspection is recommended.
Table 4-7-1

4-12
 User Manual

Conditions
1 2 3 4 5 6
Name
RBC (sediment) - + - - - +
BLD (chemistry) - + + + + +
WBC (sediment) + + + - + -
LEU (chemistry) - + - - - -
NIT (chemistry) + + + + + +
BACT (sediment) + - - + + -

(1)Addition:
Choose the urine culture condition from the list on the left. For the combination of chemistry items (BLD, LEU
and NIT) and sediment items (RBC, WBC and BACT), if “WBC positive” and “LEU positive” are selected as the
microscopic examination conditions, click , selected microscopic examination conditions are added tothe
list. After the Analyzer test, if the chemistry results and sediment results meet the set urine culture conditions, the
lines of sample results onthe list are displayed in yellow.
(2)Modification:
Click the lines of urine culture conditions in the list box, then re-choose the urine culture conditions on the left
and click to modify the set urine cultureconditions.
(3)Clearing:

In case of an error found during the selection of urine culture conditions, click at any time to re-choose
the conditions.
(4)Deletion:
If the set urine culture conditions are not necessary, the conditions can be deleted. Click the lines of urine culture
conditions in the list box, and then click to delete them.
After the urine culture conditions are deleted, no color prompt for urine culture is provided regardless of the test
results.

4.8 Door control settings

Click , and the interface is as shown below:

Fig. 4-8-1

4-13
 User Manual

If the user only carries out sediment testing and hopes to decide whether it’s necessary to carry out chemistry
testing through sediment results, then door control function can be enabled.
When “Door control switch” is ticked, it indicates door control is enabled.
Setting options: when sediment test results meet the setting options, chemistry testings is carried out
automatically.

4-14
 User Manual

Chapter 5 Reagent Management

5.1 Overview
“Reagent” realizes the management of recharging.

5.2 Reagent info management

Click in the main key area of the software; and the interface is as shown below:

Fig. 5-2-1

(1)Recharge: Insert a reagent registration card into the card reader, click the button and the
interface is as shown below:

Fig. 5-2-2

5-1
 User Manual

Input the recharge volume, click . Recharge succeeded will be diaplayed. The remaining volume and
life will be displayed on the reagent info list.

(2)Zero: click the button, and the interface is as shown below:

Fig. 5-2-3

The remaining volume can be modified by clicking .

The remaining volume is changed to 0 after clicking .

5.3 Recharge info management

Click to select query time (all, this year, or this month), and then the list displays the reagent recharging info of
the corresponding period of time.

5.4 Reagent consumption statistics

Input a start date and end date, click the button, and the left displays the accumulated consumption
of each reagent.

5.5 Reagent remaining volume remainding

When remaining volume of reagents is less than the alarm value, it’s prompted that remaining volume of reagents
is insufficient.

5-2
 User Manual

Chapter 6 Calibration

6.1 Morphology focus

To photograph and image the urine sediments passing through the focusing plane of the microscope, the Auto
Analyzer shall start focusing once daily and then sample test is conducted so that the Analyzer can accurately
classify the urine sediments based on the particle size, shape, contrast ratio and texture.
(1)Preparation before focusing
a)Inject about 8mL of well-shaken focusing solution (Level 2) into the glass test tube.

The focusing solution (Level 2) needs shaking 1 to 3 minutes by turning uside down.
b)Place the tube at the front most of the tube rack.
(2)Precautions for focusing
a)During the focusing, plastic tube or plastic pipette cannot be used.
b)To ensure the photographed image is clear, the focusing solution designed by the manufacturer shall be used.
c)After the initial start each day, the Analyzer shall start focusing once.
(3)Focusing test

a)Place the tube rack on the right of the sample feeding unit, click in the main key area of the
software and the interface is as shown below:

Fig. 6-1-1

b)Click on the interface (Fig. 6-1-1), and sample-aspirating probe automatically aspirates
samples. After the focusing, the Analyzer automatically conducts blank test and then enters in standby state.
c)In case of focusing failure, “focusing failed” is prompted onthe screen. At this time, do not conduct sample
test and restart focusing. If the focusing still fails, please contact Customer Service Department or agent of the
manufacturer.
(4)Print focusing records

Input the lot number of focusing solution in the input box following “Lot No.”, click below the list
of focusing records and a window as shown below will pop up:

6-1
 User Manual

Fig. 6-1-2

Select the operator, focusing result and date from the pull-down menu, then click “OK” and the corresponding
print preview report will pop up.

6.2 Morphology calibration

(1)Storage of calibration liquid
a)Calibration liquid is a solution contains aldehyde cock red cells and the cell quantity is the particle number
noted on the reagent bottle label.
b)Calibration liquid shall be stored in an environment with temperature between 2°C~8°C and used after
balanced to room temperature.
c)Calibration liquid shall not be used once frozen.
(2)Use of calibration liquid
a)Evenly shake before use: place the calibration liquid upside down, shake it with force for 5 times first, then
invert it vertically for 5 times, and use it after the bubbles disappear.
b)The calibration liquid shall be immediately used upon uncapped. It can only be used once and the remaining
cannot be used. The calibration liquid of different batches cannot be used in a mixed manner.
(3)Calibration frequency of Analyzer
Analyzer shall at least conduct one calibration monthly and start a focus before the calibration.
(4)Preparation before calibration
a)Take out ten glass tubes and inject sediment calibration liquid of the same bottle into each tube (each
tube≥3.5mL).

The calibration liquid needs shaking 1 to 3 minutes by turning upside down.

b)Place ten tubes successively in the tube rack.
(5)Precautions for calibration
a)During the calibration, plastic tube or plastic pipette cannot be used.
b)To ensure the calibration effect is not affected, use the calibration liquid designated by the manufacturer.
(6)Calibration test
a)Place the tube rack on the right side of the sample feeding unit.

6-2
 User Manual

b)Input the lot number and mean of calibration liquidon the interface (Fig. 6-1-1), click

, and sample-aspirating probe automatically aspirates samples. After test for ten tubes
is completed, the calibration state is displayed on the interface (meanwhile, the calibration time and coefficient

are displayed in interface). If the solution is successfully calibrated, “Pass” is displayed in

“State” of the screen and the Analyzer automatically enters in standby state.
c)If calibration fails, “Failed” is displayed in “State” of the screen. In this case, another batch of calibration
liquid shall be used for calibration and if calibration still fails, please contact Customer Service Department or
agent of the manufacturer.
(7)Print urine sediment calibration records

Click below the calibration record list and a window as shown below will pop up:

Fig. 6-2-1

Select the lot number, calibration coefficient, state and date fromthe pull-down menu, then click
and corresponding print preview report will pop up.

6.3 Refractometer module calibration (refractometer module is optional)

Click “Refractometer module calibration” on the interface (Fig. 6-1-1), and the interface is as shown below:

6-3
 User Manual

Fig. 6-3-1

6.3.1 Calibrate refractometer

Preparation of calibration liquid: take two test tubes, pour 1.040 high specific gravity calibration liquid (≥3.5mL) in
the first tube, and purified water (≥3.5mL) (low specific gravity calibration liquid) in the second tube.Put the tube
with high specific gravity calibration liquid in the first place of the test tube rack and the tube with low specific
gravity calibration liquid in the second place. Input 40 in the high specific gravity calibration column and 0 in the
low specific gravity calibration column. Place the tube rack on the right side of the sample feeding unit, click

, conduct specific gravity calibration, and a dialog box as shown below will automatically pop up
after the calibration:

Fig. 6-3-2

Click to complete refractometer calibration. If the calibration fails, a dialog box indicating
“Refractometer calibration failed” pops up. In this case, clean the refractometer according to the refractometer
cleaning method in the maintenance of Analyzer. If the calibration still fails after the cleaning, please contact
Customer Service Department or agent of the manufacturer.

Click below the refractometer calibration and a window as shown below will pop up:

6-4
 User Manual

Fig. 6-3-3

Select operator, calibration result, and date fromthe pull-down menu, then click and corresponding
print preview report will pop up.
6.3.2 Calibrate turbidimeter
Preparation of calibration liquid: take two test tubes, pour 400NTU high turbidity calibration liquid (≥3.5mL)
(liquid level is not below the scale mark of tube rack) in the first tube, and purified water (≥3.5mL) (liquid level is
not below the scale mark of tube rack) as low turbidity calibration liquidin the second tube.Put the tube with high
turbidity calibration liquid in the first place of the test tube rack and the tube with low turbidity calibration liquid
in the second place. Input 400 in the high turbidity calibration column and 0 in the low turbidity calibration

column. Place the tube rack on the right side of the sample feeding unit, click , conduct turbidity
calibration, and a dialog box as shown below will automatically pop up after the calibration:

Fig. 6-3-4

Click to complete turbidimeter calibration. If the calibration fails, a dialog box indicating
“Turbidimeter calibration failed” pops up. In this case, clean the turbidimeter according to the turbidimeter
cleaning method in the maintenance of Analyzer. If the calibration still fails after the cleaning, please contact
Customer Service Department or agent of the manufacturer.

Click below the turbidimeter calibration and a window as shown below will pop up:

6-5
 User Manual

Fig. 6-3-5

Select the operator, calibration result, and date fromthe pull-down menu, then click and the
corresponding print preview report will pop up.

Refractometer and turbidimeter shall be calibrated once per month.

6.3.3 Calibrate conductivity
Calibration preparation: take 3 clean, empty tubes, pour80mS/cmUrine Conductivity Analysis Calibrator (Level 3)
≥3.5mL in the first tube, pour 50mS/cmUrine Conductivity Analysis Calibrator (Level 2) ≥3.5mL in the second
tube, pour 1.5mS/cmUrine Conductivity Analysis Calibrator (Level 1) ≥3.5mL in the third tube (liquid level is not
below the scale mark of tube rack), and place the three tubes in position 1, 2 and 3 of the same test tube rack. Put

the test tube rack on the right of the sample feeding unit. Click to carry out automatic calibration
of conductivity. After passing the calibration, the dialog pops up automatically:

Fig. 6-3-6

Click to complete standard strip test. If the strip fails in the test, a dialog box indicating “Standard
strip fails to pass the test” pops up. In this case, recalibration is needed. If it still fails in the test, please contact
Customer Service Department or agent of the manufacturer.

Click below the standard strip test and a window as shown below will pop up:

6-6
 User Manual

Fig. 6-3-7

Select the operator, calibration result, and date fromthe pull-down menu, then click and
corresponding print preview report will pop up.

6-7
User Manual

6-8
 User Manual

Chapter 7 Quality control

7.1 Overview
Quality control (QC) program is to verify and test the analytical correctness of Analyzer by testing QC products of
urine substance and collecting QC data.
QC inspection is designed to ensure the accuracy and repeatability of the test results.

7.2 QC Solution
(1)About QC of Analyzer
a)QC is used for the quality control of measurement results of Analyzer; positive QC, as an abnormal QC type
and negative QC, as a normal QC type, are both used to verify if the Analyzer can correctly measure or count
values.
b)Positive QC of sediment is a solution with fixed quantity of RBC in ionic-equilibrium liquid. The quantity of
cells is the particle number noted on the label of positive QC.
c)Negative QC of sediment is a solution that does not contain particles.
d)QC must be stored at a cold place but it cannot be frozen. It must be balanced to room temperature before
used each time.
(2)QC frequency of Analyzer
a)To ensure the accuracy of sediment test results, positive and negative QC of sediment shall be operated at
least once per day or in accordance with the standards in laboratory QC program manual and a focusing shall be
conducted before QC.
b)To ensure the accuracy of chemistry test results, positive and negative urine analysis QC of the manufacturer
can be used to conduct QC test in following cases.
 When the test is started every day;
 When a new bottleof strips is used;
 When the operator is changed;
 When test results are in doubt.
c)To ensure the accuracy of refractometer test results, specific gravity, turbidity and color QC of the
manufacturer can be used to conduct QC test in following cases. (When refractometer is optional)
 The test is conducted once per month;
 When test results are in doubt.

7.3 QC setting
(1)Alarm range

Click in the software main key area, then click and the interface is as shown
below:

7-1
 User Manual

Fig. 7-3-1

Select normal alarm range, click and a dialog box as shown below will pop up:

Fig. 7-3-2

Click to save the set QC range.

(2)Set chemistry QC
The upper and lower limits of the negative target value and positive target value in QC items can be set by ticking
the QC items displayed in chemistry QC list on the left side of the interface (Fig. 7-3-1) and “No negative target
value” or “No positive target value” can be ticked if no target range is provided.

Click to save QC settings.

7.4 Morphology QC registration

Click and the interface is as shown below:

7-2
 User Manual

Fig. 7-4-1

7.4.1 Morphology QC registration

(1)Add QC item
a)Select a correct option from the pull-down menu of control liquid type.
b)Input the corresponding parameters in the input box of lot number, name, QC manufacturer, mean and SD
value.
c)Click the pull-down menu following “Expiry Date” and a dialog box as shown below will pop up:

Fig. 7-4-2

Correctly select the date according to the validity period noted on QC manual and click .
(2)Delete QC item

Select the QC item to be deleted in the QC register list on the interface (Fig. 7-4-1), click and a
dialog box as shown below will pop up:

Fig. 7-4-3

7-3
 User Manual

Click to delete the QC item selected.

7.4.2 Morphology QC test
(1)Use QC
Evenly shake before use: invert the sediment analysis control liquid (positive control level 3)vertically and use it
after the bubbles disappear.

Since the sediment analysis control liquid (Negative Control) does not contain particles, it is unnecessary to
shakeit before use.
(2)Precautions for QC test
a)During QC, plastic tube or plastic pipette cannot be used.
b)To ensure the QC results are not affected, use the QC designated by the manufacturer.
(3)Preparation before QC test
a)Respectively pour about 2mL of Positive Control (Level 3) and 2mL of Negative Control into two tubes.
b)Place the two tubes in the tube rack according to the sequence listed in QC register.
(4)QC test
a)Place the tube rack on the right side of the sample feeding unit, tick the box in front of QC lot number to be
tested on the “Morphology QC” interface and click , and sample-aspirating probe automatically
aspirates samples. After the tubes in the tube rack are tested, relevant QC information and QC state are
displayed on the screen, tube rack moves to the left side of the sample feeding unit and the Analyzer
automatically enters in standby state.
b)If QC fails in the test, “Failed” is displayed in “State” of the screen. In this case, another batch of QC shall be
used for recheck and if it still fails, please contact Customer Service Department or agent of the manufacturer.

7.5 Chemistry QC registration

Click on the interface (Fig. 7-3-1), and the interface is as shown below:

Fig. 7-5-1

7.5.1 Chemistry QC registration

(1)Add QC item
a)From the control liquid type pull-down menu select the correct option.

7-4
 User Manual

b)Input the corresponding parameters in the input box of QC lot number, QC name and QC manufacturer.
c)After selecting the expiry date from the pull-down menu, click the [Add] button.
(2)Delete QC item
Select the QC item to be deleted from the QC registration list on the interface (Figure 7-5-1), and click the [Delete]
button. The selected QC item will be deleted.
7.5.2 Chemistry QC test
(1)Pour the Urinalysis Control (Negative) and Urinalysis Control (Positive) produced by Dirui into two test tubes.
(2)Place the tube containing the Urinalysis Control (Negative) and the Urinalysis Control (Positive) on the test
tube rack in turn, and place the test tube rack on the right side of the sample-feeding unit.
(3)Click to check the registered negative control and positive control in the quality control registration interface,
and then click the [Conduct QC] button. The aspirating probe will automatically perform the aspirating action.
After the test is completed, the control result will be displayed in the current chart data column, and the Analyzer
automatically enters the standby state.
If the quality control fails, "Failure" is displayed in the "Status" column on the screen. At this time, replace with
the quality control of another lot and perform one more time. If it is still unsuccessful, please contact the Dirui
Customer Service Department or the distributor.

7.6 Morphology QC review

Click tag on the interface (Fig. 7-3-1) as shown below to check the tested QC information.

Fig. 7-6-1

7.6.1 Inquire morphology QC

Tick in morphology QC inquiry column on the interface (Fig. 7-6-1) and the interface is as
shown below:

7-5
 User Manual

Fig. 7-6-2

(1)Inquire by Lot No.

Choose the lot numberto be inquired from the list box below Lot No., click and the interface is as
shown below:

Fig. 7-6-3

All QC results for lot number of 326 are displayed on the screen. Click to preview QC results and
the interface is as shown below:

7-6
 User Manual

Fig. 7-6-4

Click in the window to print QC results.

(2)Inquire by QC name

Select QC name fromthe list under Name (Fig. 7-6-2) (for example select AA), click and the interface
is as shown below:

Fig. 7-6-5

All positive results passing QC test (the names are AA) are displayed on the screen, and click to

preview QC results, the interface is as shown in Fig. 7-6-4, then click to print QC results.
(3)Inquire by state
Select post-QC test status onthe list in status bar of the interface (Fig. 7-6-2) (for example select pass), and click
, as shown below:

7-7
 User Manual

Fig. 7-6-6

All results passing QC test are displayed on the screen, click to preview QC results and the

interface is as shown in Fig. 7-6-4. Click to print QC results.

(4)Inquire by da3te-time
Select radio button before “Use Date-Time”on the interface (Fig. 7-6-2), then select the start date, start time and
end date, end time, and click , as shown below:

Fig. 7-6-7

All results passing QC test of the selected period are displayed on the screen, click to preview

QC results and the interface is as shown in Fig. 7-6-4. Click to print QC results.
7.6.2 Delete morphology QC result
Choose the line (if it is not chosen, a dialog box will pop up) of QC result to be modified from QC list on the

7-8
 User Manual

interface (Fig. 7-6-1), click and the interface is as shown below:

Fig. 7-6-8

Click to complete modification.

7.6.3 LIS export

Click the button to export QC results through LIS system.

7.6.4 View morphology QC chart

In Figure 7-6-1 click the in the left-handcorner; then the following window pops up:

Fig. 7-6-9

7.7 Chemistry QC review

On the interface (Fig. 7-7-1) click tab and the interface is as shown below:

7-9
 User Manual

Fig. 7-7-1

Tick “Date” ( ) under Query Term and specify the time period to be queried in

to query color, turbidy, specific gravity, negative or positive QC

record within a time. Click the button to display the query results on the list.

The operator can choose multiple query results. Click the button to send all the queried results

to the LIS server. Click the button to send the seleted queried results.

Click the button to delete the seleted query results.

Click to display the figure below:

Fig. 7-7-2

7.8 Morphology QC statistics

Click on the interface (Fig. 7-6-1), and the interface is as shown below. The operator can

7-10
 User Manual

check and print the QC chart.

Fig. 7-8-1

7.8.1 QC chart
(1)About QC chart
a)X-coordinate of QC chart represents QC date and Y-coordinate represents quality QC line.
b)At most 31 points can be displayed in QC chart.
c)Each point in QC chart corresponds to a QC result and the points are connected by line sections.
(2)Check and print QC chart
a)Click the pull-down menu following “QC date”, select QC date to be inquired, and select QC lot number to be
inquired from the pull-down menu following “QC lot number”, then QC name to be inquired from the pull-down
menu following “QC name”, and the inquired results are displayed on the QC chart.

b)Click to preview the QC chart and the interface is as shownbelow:

7-11
 User Manual

Fig. 7-8-2

Click to print the QC chart.

7.8.2 About QC
x (average value): arithmetic mean of a group of figures calculated as per the formula below:
n

X i
X i 1

n
SD (standard deviation): a statistical method describing the dispersion degree of a group of measured values
calculated as per the formula below:

7-12
 User Manual

 (X i  X) 2
SD  i 1
n 1
Where: n is test times and Xi is the measured value in each time.
CV value (variable coefficient): the ratio between standard deviation and mean is the variable coefficient which is
another statistics reflecting the variation degree of measured value, and the variable coefficient is calculated as per
the formula below:
SD
CV   100%
X

7.9 Chemistry QC statistics

On the interface (Figure 7-6-1) click . The figure is as shown below: QC charts can be
viewed and printed.

Fig. 7-9-1

7.10 Standard strip test

On the interface (Fig. 7-8-1) click and the interface is as shown below:

Fig. 7-10-1

7-13
 User Manual

Place the standard strip in the strip-selecting device according to the direction mark, click , the
Analyzer starts to test the standard strip, when the testing head finishes in scanning the standard strip, the
following dialog pops up:

Fig. 7-10-2

Click to complete the standard strip test. If calibration failed, the “Standard strip failed” dialog will
pop up. At this time calibrate again. If it still failed, contact DIRUI customer service department or distributor.

Click the button; then the following window pops up:

Fig. 7-10-3

From the pull-down menues select the operator, calibration result and date, and click to make the
corresponding print preview report sheet pop up.

● Do not dip the standard strip in water (or other liquid) for testing.
● Accompanying the Analyzer, there are four standard strips, two 12-item strips, and one 13-item and
14-item strip.
● If the standard strip is stained or damaged, please contact the supplier. Don’t use the standard strip for
testing.
● To ensure correct test results, it’s recommended to use the standard strip to calibrate the Analyzer every
other 1 or 2 week.

7.11 One-key test

On the interface (Fig. 7-9-1) click and the interface is as shown below:

7-14
 User Manual

Fig. 7-11-1

Choose one or several combinations of focusing, sediment calibration, sediment QC, chemistry QC, and sample
testing according to the need, input Focus lot number, calibrator lot number,start sample No., click
to complete all relevant tests in sequence at a time.

7-15
User Manual

7-16
 User Manual

Chapter 8 Sample test

● If the bubbles in a test sample arehigher than 5mm, test can only be conducted after deposition until the
bubblesarelower than 5mm.
● Operator shall be kept away from the sample-aspirating position of sample probe to prevent injury.
● Avoid viscous test sample to prevent sample probe blocking.
● Waste liquid tank of the Analyzer shall be placed on the ground and waste pipeline shall be perpendicular
to the ground to the greatest extent to ensure smooth waste liquid flow.

8.1 Pre-test preparation

8.1.1 Precautions for sample preparation
(1)Place collected urine in the cleaning or disinfection utensil.
(2)Use fresh urine sample. If test is not conducted within 2 hours after collection, please seal urine and store it in
cold environment of 2℃~8℃, and the sample temperature shall be recovered to room temperature before test.
(3)Do not add preservative, disinfectant, or detergent in urine samples.
(4)Keep urine samples away from direct exposure to sunlight.
(5)Before the test, please evenly mix urine samples. Do not centrifugate samples, otherwise the sensitivity of test
results will be affected.
(6)If urine sample contains ascorbic acid, blood, glucose, bilirubin and etc., test results may be lower than real
value (chemistry result).
(7)When urine samples are tested, the Analyzer must be used under required service environment for test. If the
temperature exceeds the range, the accuracy of the test results may be affected.
8.1.2 Sample volume
The minimum volume of sample needed by the Analyzer is 3.0mL.

Pointed test tube is needed when sample volume is 3mL; do not fill up test tube during test, because the
Analyzer will automatically mix and aspirate the sample to prevent liquid overflow.

8.1.3 Tube requirements

(1)Specification of sample tube: 16mm x 100mm test tube, tube orifice is regular without compressional
deformation.
(2)Specification of tube rack: use accompanying tube rack.
8.1.4 Requirements for use of bar codes
(1)Bar code type: acceptable bar codes are CODE128, CODE39, CODE93, CODEBAR and
INTERLEAVED2OF5 (I2OF5).
(2)Print span of bar code shall be within 8mm-12mm (avoid the condition that the Analyzer cannot read the bar
code during tube rotation) and the effective length of bar code shall not be longer than 40mm. When the bar code
is sheared, its start margin and end margin shall not be less than 3mm, the number of digits of bar codes
CODE128, CODE93, CODEBAR and INTERLEAVED2OF5 (I2OF5) shall be greater than 4 but less than 20 and
the number of digits of bar code CODE39 shall be greater than 4 but less than 12 as shown in Fig. 8-1-1:

8-1
 User Manual

Fig. 8-1-1

(3)Paste requirements of bar code label: bar code label shall be pasted in a flat manner without crumple and
pollution and the print of bar code lines cannot be incomplete as this may lead to incorrect reading.
During the pasting, lower edge of the bar code shall be at least 45mm above the tube bottom to ensure that the bar
code is correctly scanned and pasted as shown below (Fig. 8-1-2). When tubes are placed in the tube rack, make
sure all bar code labels can be seen from the longitudinal slot of the tube rack; ensure tubes are vertically placed
close against the base.

Fig. 8-1-2

(4)See Table 8-1-1 for number of digits of different bar codes:

Table 8-1-1

Type of sample bar Number of identification

Identification characters
codes digits
Figures 0~9, A~Z, special characters (like -.
Code39 4~12
space $ / + %)
Code128 4~20 128 ASCII characters
Code93 4~20 128 ASCII characters
Figures 0~9, number of identified characters
12of5 4~20
must be even number
CODEBAR 4~20 Figures 0~9, special characters (like $-:/. +)

8.1.5 Check sheath liquid, waste liquid, reagent strip and printer
(1)Sheath liquid: place enough sheath liquid in sheath liquid tank.
(2)Waste liquid: insert the waste pipeline into the waste liquid tank and ensure there is sufficient space in the tank
to discharge waste liquid.
(3)Reagent strip: check whether strips are placed in the strip sealed bin.
(4)Printer: check if the printer power cable and data cable are correctly connected and print papers are sufficient.

8.2 Sample test

8.2.1 Connect power cable and log in the software
(1)Switch on power switches of the computer host and display.

8-2
 User Manual

(2)Switch on printer power switch and arrange print paper.

(3)Switch on Analyzer power switch.
(4)Log in Analyzer application software and the Analyzer enters in standby state.
8.2.2 Confirm Analyzer state
(1)Confirm Analyzer state

Click in the main key area of the software and the interface is as shown below:

Fig. 8-2-1

(2)In case of an alarm at the Analyzer, alarm icon flashes. If an alarm sound is also needed to be given by

the buzzer, click in the main key area to enter in the “instrument setting” interface, set the “alarm
sound” as “on” and the interface is as shown below:

Fig. 8-2-2
Thus double tips will be given in case of an alarm at the Analyzer.

8-3
 User Manual

(3)Morphology calibration
a)Focusing: operate as per “6.1Morphology focus” and conduct such operation once a day after the start.
b)Calibration: operate as per “6.2 Morphology calibration” and conduct such operation at least once per month.
(4)Chemistry calibration
Refractometer, turbidity: operate as per “6.3.1 Calibrate refractometer” and “6.3.2 Calibrate turbidimeter” and
conduct such operation at least once per month.
Calibration strip test: operate as per “7.9Standard strip test”.
(5)QC
Operate according to “7.4.2 Sediment QC test” and “7.5.2 Chemistry QC test”. Execute once every day when
turning on the instrument.

The Analyzer shall operate in the sequence of “Focusing”, “Calibration” and “QC” and if calibration is
required, it shall operate in the sequence of “Focusing” and “QC”.

8.2.3 Sample test

(1)Place the test tube with bar code pasted and urine samples in tube rack and ensure that tubes are perpendicular
to rubber base.
(2)Place the tube rack on the right of Analyzer sample feeder unit, and the interface is as shown below:

Fig. 8-2-3

Click in the main key area of software, and select test mode in “Sample Management”, then click
“Start” or press “Start” button of the Analyzer, the tube rack is automatically sent to sample-aspirating position of
the Analyzer, and the interface is as shown below:

8-4
 User Manual

Fig. 8-2-4

(1)Located sample: sample management window, set at most 9999 samples. Input sample number in the input box
at the left side of , and click button, then directly enter corresponding located sample page
(there is no need to click or to turn page).

(2)Batch modification: click on the interface (Fig. 8-2-4) to modify the sample test items by
batch and the interface is as shown below:

Fig. 8-2-5

8.2.4 ER registration
Click the “Emergency” button on the sample registration interface, and open the setting dialog box of starting
sample number, as shown below:

8-5
 User Manual

Fig. 8-2-6

(1)When firstly open the emergency starting sample setting window after logging in, sample number is 1 by
default; sample type is urine by default; sample mode is all modes by default which can be selected from the
pull-down menu, including: all, sediment and chemistry.
(2)After the emergency sample is placed at emergency position, input bar code number of emergency sample,

click the button in Fig. 8-2-6 to start emergency test.

(3)After the test, sample number starting with E on the list on the sample registration interface is emergency
sample, as shown below:

Fig. 8-2-7

Do not review emergency sample.

8.3 During testing process

8.3.1 Edit patient information

Patient information can be edited during sample test and before post-test verification, but to save time, it
can be edited during sample test.

Click in the main key area and the interface is as shown below:

8-6
 User Manual

Fig. 8-3-1

(1)Select sample number by clicking and .

(2)Input the patient’s name, age, case number, bed number and note information; select the gender, age unit,
patient type, sample type, test time, sending department, sending doctor, dilution ratio and other information
(mnemonics can be used during registration), then click the button to finish editing, and patient
information will be automatically shown on browsing area.
Age: input age in the input box and select proper age unit from the pull-down menu. This function can be set in
the “Management” window of the main key area. Refer to “3.9 Age information” for specific operation.
Patient type: select a proper type from the pull-time list. This function can be set in the “Management” window of
the main key area. Refer to “3.4 Patient information” for specific operation.
Sending department: select the type of department to which sending sample belongs from the pull-down menu.
This function can be set in the “Management” window of the main key area. Refer to “3.2 Department
information” for specific operation.
Sending doctor: select the doctor name from the pull-down menu. This function can be set in the “Management”
window of the main key area. Refer to “3.3 Doctor information” for specific operation.
Sample type: select a proper type from the pull-down menu.
Dilution ratio: select a proper type from pull-down menu. This function can be set in the “Management” window
of the main key area. Refer to “3.6 Dilution ratio” for specific operation.

(3)After edition, click to modify patient information.

(4)Edit display item: click the button to open the edit display item window, as shown in Fig.
7-3-2, so as to set the display and display setting of sample information and sample list:

8-7
 User Manual

Fig. 8-3-2

a)Cancel part of ticked sample items on the list at the left side in Fig. 8-3-2, click and restart the
software, thus corresponding content of canceled edit item will not be displayed in the browsing area of the
sample registration interface, as shown below:

Fig. 8-3-3

b)Cancel part of ticked sample items on the list at the right side in Fig. 8-3-2, click and restart
the software, and corresponding content of canceled edit item will not be displayed in the browsing area of the
sample registration interface, as shown below:

8-8
 User Manual

Fig. 8-3-4

(5)Condition filter: click button, and the “Condition Filter” window pops up, as shown below:

Fig. 8-3-5

Set condition filter (click and tick the related item of “Enable”) and click , then the
sample record in line with the condition filter will be displayed on the lists of the sample registration interface, as
shown below (if tick the “Audited” item):

8-9
 User Manual

Fig. 8-3-6

(6)Sample positioning: on the sample registration interface, sample positioning can be conducted by both ID
number and sample number.
a)Positioning by ID number: click selected “ID”, as shown below:

Fig. 8-3-7

Input ID number in input box, click the button and the sample can be located by the cursor.
b)Positioning by sample number: click selected “Sample No.”, as shown below:

Fig. 8-3-8

Input sample number in input box, click the button and the sample can be located by the cursor.

Explanation about color alarm on the interface (Fig. 8-3-1):

● If there is hybrid/non-uniform RBC alarm in the Analyzer test result and the fonts of the result are red,
the record on sample registration list displays in yellow;
● If the Analyzer test results accord with microscopic condition and urine culture given condition (set in
“Re-examination rule” of “System setting” and see details of re-examination rule in Section 4.7), the record
on the sample registration list displays in yellow.
Description for severely turbid sample:
● When conduct rational index test and urine sample is identified as severely turbid, “!” will be displayed
in front of chemistry color test item to show that turbidity may have impact on the accuracy of color test.
8.3.2 Confirm alarm information

In case of a failure during the test, the software gives an alarm prompt and an alarm icon in the prompt

8-10
 User Manual

column at top right corner of the screen will flash. Click alarm icon , and the alarm number, code, level and
brief description of contents are displayed. The interface is as shown:

Fig. 8-3-9

To view details of an alarm record, click the information bar through mouse, and the detailed description as well
as solution of the alarm will display in the text box below. The interface is as shown below:

Fig. 8-3-10

Users shall refer to solutions to handle problems and if the faults remain unsolved, please contact Customer
Service Department of the manufacturer.
8.3.3 Query and export of alarm info

Alarm info can be queried by clicking . Alarm info can be exported in the format of txt or xlsx by

clicking .
8.3.4 Delete alarm information

Choose the alarm information to be deleted with the mouse and click below and the selected alarm

8-11
 User Manual

record is deleted. Click and all alarm records under the “Alarm Info” window are deleted.

8.4 Recheck of sample

If to recheck samples after the first test, select the sample to be rechecked fromthe “test result” list ,

and click on the interface (Fig. 8-3-1), as shown in the figure:

Fig. 8-4-1

(1)Selection of actual test mode: the default of the actual test mode is same as the test mode.
If to recheck the samples whose mode is “All”, select “All” mode or recheck the sediment or the unit chemistry
separately:
Select the sample record to be rechecked; The actual recheck test mode can be modified in the pull-down menu.
(2)Start recheck
a)Place the sample to be rechecked in another test tube rack, and place the test tube rack at the right side of
Analyzer sample feeding unit.
b)The sample numbers in Fig. 8-4-1 are defaulted as selected (there is a mark “√” before the sample number).
Click and the samples can be rechecked.
c)If to recheck, test after sample dilution, and select the relating dilution times fromthe pull-down menu of
recheck dilution times at the left side of the interface (Fig. 8-4-1) and then start recheck.
(3)View the rechecktest
The recheck results display on the row of “recheck results”onthe test result list as shown in the figure:

8-12
 User Manual

Fig. 8-4-2

(4)After rechecking the samples of sediment or in “All mode”, double-click the record and enter the review
interface, and the recheck results replaced the original results.
After finishing rechecking, the recheck results will automatically display in the results column.

● Only the results of the day can be rechecked.

● If to recheck samples, it is required to click “Start recheck” and then send the recheck instruction.
● Samples failed the test will be automatically added to the recheck list
● In the window of Figure 8-4-1, only the records of the “Whole” mode can be modified in terms of the
recheck type; only those of the “Morphology” mode can be modified in terms of the recheck dilution
multiple.

8.5 Test results

On the test information list on the interface as shown in Fig. 8-3-1, double-click to select the tested sample
information to check test results, and the interface is as shown below:

Fig. 8-5-1

(1)Urine chemistry results of corresponding samples are displayed on the right of the interface, as well as the
coccus quantity of morphology.
(2)The analysis results of sediments are displayed on the left where the sediments in results and threshold range
can be checked. Results within normal range are blue and results within abnormal range are red and displayed in
red in exceeding display area.
(3)If there are too many formed elements in the test results, scroll.

(4)Click or to preview other sample test results.

8-13
 User Manual

(5)Possible reasons for causing yellow alarm: if the sample is marked in yellow, the possible reasons for causing
the yellow alarm can be displayed in the right box, such as “accord with Hybrid/Non-Uniform RBC”, “accord
with hybrid/non-uniform RBC” and “accord with urine culture given condition”.
8.5.1 Preview test item images
Double-click the sediments result with cell mark, and the image of particles will display in an amplification form
on the screen. Double check “NRBC” and the figure below will display:

Fig. 8-5-2

(1)Add images in the report

Choose images of typical test item on the interface (Fig. 8-5-2), right click and
pull-down menu will pop up. Choose option “Send to printing report” as shown in Fig. 8-5-3 and left click to send
the images to the note information column of the report:

Fig. 8-5-3

(2)Delete images in the report

If the typical images of all items sent to print report list are mis-operated, choose option “Delete from the print

report” from pull-down menu popping up in Fig. 8-5-3. The images of items sent
to print report can be deleted and then new images can be added again.
8.5.2 Manual classification of images
In case of false identification, the images can be reclassified and the operation isas follows:
Choose the images inconsistent with the name of sediments on the interface (Fig. 8-5-3), click corresponding
category buttons on the right of the screen to complete reclassification, click “Back” to go back to interface as
shown in Fig. 8-5-1, then click to confirm and save above modifications.

8-14
 User Manual

● Choose “When accepted, jump to the next sample” from “Setting” → “Instrument setup”, i.e.
state, and the Analyzer automatically jumps to the next sample
for manual classification of next sample after above operation.
● Choose “When accepted, jump to the next sample” from “System setting” → “Instrument setup”, i.e.
state, and the Analyzer automatically sends the results to LIS server after
above operation.
In above steps, if an option has been dragged but an operation error is found, such operation can be canceled by
pressing on the interface (Fig. 8-5-1) before is clicked.
Following items can be automatically identified:
Normal red blood cell, microcyte, acanthoid erythrocyte, erythrocyte ghost, other poikilocytes, WBC, white blood
cell clump, non-squamous epithelial cell, renal tubular epithelial cell, transitional epithelial cell, hyaline cast,
granular cast, waxy cast, broad cast, other casts, bacillus, coccus, pseudohypha, microzyme, calcium oxalate, uric
acid crystal, magnesium ammonium phosphate crystal, other crystals, sperm and mucous strands.
Following items can be manually identified:

Crystallization Tube type Others

Calcium oxalate Granular cast Renal epithelial cells

Triple phosphate crystal Cellular cast Pseudohypha

Calcium phosphate Waxy cast Red blood cell clumps

Leucine crystal Broad cast Oval fat bodies

Transitional epithelial
Amorphous crystal Red blood cell cast
cells
Uric acid crystal White blood cell cast Trichomonad

Calcium carbonate Epithelial cast Fat

Cystine crystal Fatty cast ——

Tyrosine crystal —— ——

8.5.3 Preview of sediment boundary

Enter the sediment image preview interface and select the image of sediment to be tested, then move the mouse,
and the diameter of sediment will display to help the doctor make judgment as shown in the figure.

8-15
 User Manual

Fig. 8-5-4

8.5.4 Descriptions of alarm in test result

(1)Description of RBC alarm in test result
If there is a hybrid/non-uniform RBC alarm at the row of RBC onthe result list, the row of relating sample test
result is in yellow. At the same time, the fonts in “sediment test result list” of the left lower part of the interface
turn red, showing that manual examination by microscope is required.
Alarms descriptions:
Uniform RBC: it represents poikilocytes is less than 20%.
Hybrid/non-uniform RBC: it represents poikilocytes is more than 20%.
(2)Description of chemistry alarm in test result as shown in the figure:

Fig. 8-5-5

If the chemistry test result displays reagent strip error, the row of the relating sample test result is in blue.
If the chemistry separating test fails, the fonts of its result turn red.
If all items are tested and the morphology test fails, the fonts of its result turn red.

8-16
 User Manual

8.5.5 Modification of test results

If test results are not consistent with the microscopy results, modification can be made as below:
(1)Modification of sediment test results:
Double-click the line of sediment “results” row at lower part of the interface, and the “results” position becomes
available for modification (in square bracket) asshown in the figure.

Fig. 8-5-6

Add the microscopy results of the modification items directly, and click other item, then a dialog box “are you
sure to modify?” will pop up, click in the dialog box, then the modification is finished.
(2)Modification of chemistry test results:
Double-click the line of chemistry “results” row at lower part of the interface, and the display is as in the figure:

Fig. 8-5-7

Select the modified results fromthe pull-down menu of “target value” and click ; select the unit of
test results among the radio button listof “unit” to modify the unit of test results; if to modify the test results of
other items, click or for modification.
(3)Manually modified marks
On theworklist interface, if the results of sediments and chemistry are edited, the modified marks are displayed in
“Manually edit” row.

8.6 Validation of samples

(1)Validation of unit sample

8-17
 User Manual

If to make validation of single sample, select the record information in Fig. 8-5-5 and click , and the
“Validation” column of the related line will give the mark, or “ ”, which means that the validation of sample is
finished.
(2)Lot validation of samples

If to make validation of batched samples, click in Fig. 8-5-5 and input the sample numbers of batch
validation in the “sample number” column, then select the validator fromthe pull-down menu as shown in the
figure:

Fig. 8-6-1

Click , and close the “Lot Validation” window, the number of validation records will be displayed as
shown in the figure.

Fig. 8-6-2

● The samples are to be validated only with results, examiners and names given.
● The start sample number of lot validation should be less than or equal to the end sample number.
● The user with operator authorization can only modify or delete the samples of the day before validation,
and the user with administrator authorization can modify the samples of the day before or after validation.

8.7 Preview and printing of report

(1) Preview and printing of unit sample

Click on the interface (Fig. 8-5-5) to preview the record to be printed and the interface is as shown in

8-18
 User Manual

the figure:

Fig. 8-7-1

If to print the report, click on the interface (Fig. 8-7-1) to print it.
(2) Preview and printing of batched samples

If to have printing of batched samples, click on the interface (Fig. 8-5-5) and input the start/end
sample numbers of batch printing in the “sample number” column, then click . As shown in the figure:

Fig. 8-7-2

● The start sample number of batch printing should be less than or equal to the end sample number.
● The samples only of the day are available for batch printing.

8-19
 User Manual

8.8 Positioning test

To specify a sample when failure occurs, click . In the dialog box (Fig. 8-8-1) input sample number and
tube number of the sample to be tested into the input boxes of “Sample No.” and “Tube No.” Click
to specify sample testing.

Fig. 8-8-1

8.9 Deletion of results

If to delete a certain result, click on the interface (Fig. 8-5-5) and a dialog box as shown in Fig. 8-8-1
will pop up:

Fig. 8-9-1

Input the start/end sample numbers to be deleted in the “sample number” column, then click to
delete the results of those samples.

● The start sample number should be less than or equal to the end sample number.
● All samples can only be deleted under standby mode.

8.10 Import from LIS/Send to LIS

(1)Send to LIS:

If to send the test results to LIS after testing, click at right lower corner of the interface

8-20
 User Manual

, and the dialog box as shown in the figure will pop up.

Fig. 8-10-1

Input the start/end sample numbers to be sent to LIS in the “sample number” column, then click to
send the test data to LIS.

● If “Barcode” mode is selected for “Auto Send” and the input sample without a barcode, click “Apply”
and the dialog box will pop up:

● If there is hybrid/non-uniform RBC alarm in the Analyzer test result, send the alarm information
together with the test result data to LIS server.
(2)Import from LIS:

If to import test data of other analyzers from LIS, click at the right lower corner of the

interface, and the dialog box as shown in the figure will pop up.

Fig. 8-10-2

As is shown in the figure above, input the sample numbers from No.1 to No.32 and click , then the
test mode turns grey in sample management.

8-21
 User Manual

●If to view the figure information of test results on LIS, the typical drawings of sediments should be sent to
the report, and then the test results should be sent to LIS for preview.
●See LIS setting in Appendix B Specification of analyzer host interface (serial port) and Appendix C
Specification of Analyzer host interface (network interface)

8-22
 User Manual

Chapter 9 Data query

9.1 Overview

Click in the main key area for view, preview, modification and printing for test result report as
shown in the figure:

Fig. 9-1-1

9.2 Name-based query

Input the name of samples to be inquired on the interface (Fig. 9-1-1) and click the button “query”, then the
corresponded record will be displayed on the list at the left side of the screen. Inquire part of the sample name. If
the full name is Jone, enter any letter in the name (not case sensitive). Or if the full name is Zhang San, enter

Zhang or San. Other conditions are not set. Click , and all the historical records of the name
including the entered content can be inquired.
(1)Viewing of test results
Click the line of test results of the list on the left side and the test results will display on the right side of the screen,
i.e. “sediment test results” and “chemistry test results”.
Double-click the line of test results of the list on the left side to view all sediments of the result including standard
threshold. The results are in green in a normal range, and red in an abnormal range, and are also red in exceed
display area as shown in the figure:

9-1
 User Manual

Fig. 9-2-1

Click or to preview other sample test results.

If click the button “Big picture” and move the mouse to the cell image on the interface, it will display an image
with cells being three times larger; Double-click the coloring mark box in front of some test item (e.g. WBC) on
the right side of the big picture windows and the color selection box will pop up. Set or change the mark color (e.g.
red) and click “YES” and then all WBC in the big picture interface are marked with red borders as shown in the
following figure:

Fig. 9-2-2

(2)Preview of test item images

9-2
 User Manual

Click the sediment result with cell mark on the interface (Fig. 9-2-1), and the image of particles will amplify and
display on the screen. If click“NRBC” and the figure below will display:

Fig. 9-2-3

Click to return to the Fig. 9-2-1.

(3)Printing of report

Click on the interface (Fig. 9-1-1) to preview the acquired record and the interface is as shown in the
figure.

Fig. 9-2-4

If to print the report, click .

(4)Modification of test results:
a)Modification of sediment test results:

9-3
 User Manual

Double-click the line of sediment “results” row at the right upper part of the interface, and the “results” position
becomes available for modification (in square bracket) as shown in the figure:

Fig. 9-2-5
Add the microscopy results of the modification items directly, and click other items, then a dialog box “are you
sure to modify?” will pop up, click “YES” in the dialog box, then the modification is finished.
b)Modification of chemistry test results:
Double-click the line of chemistry “results” row at the right lower part of the interface as in the figure will
display:

Fig. 9-2-6

Select the modified results fromthe pull-down menu of “target value” and click ; if to modify the
test results of other items, click or for modification.
(5)Modification of patient information:
Click the line of samples at the left side of the interface (Fig. 9-1-1) and at the same time hold “Shift”, then the

9-4
 User Manual

interface as shown in the figure will pop up, which is available for modification of patient information.

Fig. 9-2-7

After modification, click in the above figure to save the modification.

9.3 Date-based query

Select “date” in “Query Term”on the interface (Fig. 9-1-1), or status, then select the required start/end date
for inquiry and click , next the test results within the select duration will display and the viewing,
preview and printing of test report are available as specified operation is same to 9.2 Name-basedquery.

9.4 Sample number-based query

Input the start/end sample numbers to be queried in the “Query Term” column on the interface (Fig. 9-1-1) and
click , then the relating test results will display on the screen as per the sequence of test time. If
input the sample numbers 10~15, the query results will be shown as in the figure:

9-5
 User Manual

Fig. 9-4-1

At the same time, the viewing, preview and printing of test report are available as specified operation is same (to
8.2 Name-based query).

9.5 ID number-based query

Input the ID numbers to be queried in the “Query Term” column on the interface (Fig. 9-1-1) and click
, then the test results of the selected ID will display on the screen. (e.g. the ID numbers to be
queried is “1”, the results is shown as in the figure):

Fig. 9-5-1

At the same time the viewing, preview and printing of test report are available as specified operation is same to
9.2.

9.6 Case number-based query

Input the case number, numbers to be queried in the “Query Term” column on the interface (Fig. 9-1-1) and click
, then the relating test results of the selected case number will display on the screen as shown in Fig.
9-6-1; if the input case number does not exist, the list shows empty.

9-6
 User Manual

Fig. 9-6-1

9.7 Clinical number-based fuzzy query

In the “Query Term” column on the interface (Figure 9-7-1), enter a clinical number in the “Clinical No.” input
box, click , and the test results of the corresponding clinical number are displayed on the list, as
shown in Figure 9-7-1; if the entered clinical number does not exist, the list displayed is empty.

Fig. 9-7-1

9-7
User Manual

9-8
 User Manual

Chapter 10 Maintenance of analyzer

● Don’t spill water, reagent, detergent or other solutions on the machine or electric parts of the Analyzer in
case of any damages.
● Don’t touch probe during operation of the Analyzer in case of infection or injury.
● During operation, the operators shall take preventive measures like wear protective gloves, glasses,
working suits in case of infection due to touch of polluted area or solution or skin injury due to contactwith
corrosive liquid.The operator shall rinse with water and take disinfection measures after contact withthe
polluted or corrosive liquid due to carelessness.
● If the Analyzer is installed with accessories which are not provided or recommended by the manufacturer
or the Analyzer is used otherwise specified by the manufacturer, the relating protection may be weakened.
● During maintenance process, please check whether there are hazards caused by inefficiency of hoses or
parts filled with solution.

10.1 Preparation before maintenance of analyzer

To guarantee the accuracy and precision of the Analyzer, operators shall strictly follow User Manual of
FUS-3000Plus Urinalysis Hybrid and regularly provide maintenance for the Analyzer so as to get reliable test
results and ensure the Analyzer with planned service life.
Before maintenance of the Analyzer, please prepare the following tools:
10.1.1 Articles and tools
(1)Accompanyingtools

Name of tool Reason

Cross screwdriver Screw on/off

(2)Objects prepared by users

Name of tool Reason

Brush Clean strip sealed bin
Clean gauze Clean mirror of fiber sensor
Swab Clean probe
Lens paper Clean scan window of barcode reader

10.1.2 Detergent
The detergent, used for cleaning of analyzer pipelines, should be purchased from the manufacturer, otherwise if
they are replaced by others, the probe or pipelines may not be clean, which may impact the accuracy and precision
of the test results. The company will not be responsible for any inaccuracy due to failure to use detergent
specified.

10.2 Maintenance of analyzer

10.2.1 RESET

Click in the main menu area and enter in the system maintenance interface as shown in the
figure.

10-1
 User Manual

Fig. 10-2-1

Click and the Analyzer will return to the reset point automatically.

● It is not allowed to suddenly suspend the reset process.Other operation is allowable only after standby
mode is displayed.
● Please execute reset if the alarm information give prompts or the Analyzer has an emergency stop.

10.2.2 Blank test

In case of start blank test failure or after maintenance of the Analyzer, click on the interface (Fig.
10-2-1) to conduct blank test.
The screen will display “Blank test success” as long as the blank test is acceptable.
The screen will display “Blank test failure” if the test is unacceptable. “Fill whole pipeline” (see 10.2.4) and
“Clean flow cell” (see 10.2.7) repeatedly and have the test again, if still failed, please contact consumer-service
staff of the manufacturer.

Click tag of the maintance record list and the interface is as shown below:

Fig. 10-2-2

Select operator, maintenance result, and date from the pull-down menu, then click and the print

10-2
 User Manual

preview report will pop up.

10.2.3 Empty pipeline

(1)On the interface (Fig. 10-2-1) click and then the “Pull out the external reagent supply
tube” prompt pops us.
(2)Remove the detergent supply tube connector (press down the metal button on the connector and then pull out),
the sensor plug (pull out directly), sheath liquid supply tube connector (press down the metal button on the
connector and then pull out), and the sensor plug (pull out directly) from the back of the Analyzer, as shown
below:

Fig. 10-2-3
(3)Click the [Continue] button in the software box; the Analyzer starts to perform the operation of draining.

When draining pipelines, it’s not allowed to pull out the waste liquid tube connector and waste liquid
sensor plug. In the “Standby” mode after draining the Analyzer, remove the waste liquid
tubeconnector (press down the metal button on the connector and then pull out) and waste liquid
sensor plug (pull out directly).

Divide the Analyzer into the host and sample feeder before removal.
Conduct “Empty pipeline” before stopping the Analyzer and rinse pipelines with distilled water (replace the
sheath liquid in the sheath liquid bottle by distilled water), and finally conduct “Empty pipeline” again.

The sheath liquid pipe and detergent pipe shall be separated from host interface before conducting “Empty
pipeline”.

10.2.4 Fill whole pipeline

In case of bubbles in pipelines or during replacement of sheath liquid, click on the interface (Fig.
10-2-1), and the bubbles in pipelines of the Analyzer will be emptied, which can avoid the impact of test results
caused by bubbles.

Click to stop the maintenance process.

Before reuse of the Analyzer after idling for a period of time, conduct “Fill pipelines”.

10-3
 User Manual

10.2.5 Fill sheath liquid

When there are bubbles in the sheath liquid tubing or when replacing sheath liquid, click on the
interface (Figure 10-2-1) to exhaust the bubbles in the sheath liquid tubing of the Analyzer, so as to prevent
bubbles from affecting test results.
10.2.6 Fill detergent
When there are bubbles in the detergent tubing, or when the Analyzer gives the “Detergent empty” alarm, click

on the interface (Figure 10-2-1) to exhaust the bubbles in the detergent tubing of the Analyzer,
so as to prevent bubbles from affecting test results.

The user can click to end maintenance action.

10.2.7 Clean flow cell
To avoid the impact of residual in flow cell on accuracy of testing results of the Analyzer, the flow cell shall be
cleaned every day by the following methods:
Load the test tube with around 8mL Detergent and put it in the first position of the test tube rack, then put the rack
on the right side of the sample feeder.

Click on the interface (Fig. 10-2-1) and the tube rack will be pushed to the sampling position
automatically, then the probe aspiratesabout 2mLDetergent; clean the flow cell after soaking the flow cell for
about 20min (follow the screen tips).
10.2.8 Clean sheath liquid bottle
After long storage of sheath liquid in the bottle, a layer of filthwill be formed on the bottom wall which may affect
the quality of sheath liquid, therefore the sheath liquid bottle should be cleaned once every month by the
following steps:
(1)Exit the software and turn off the power of analyzer.
(2)Open the cover plate of the Analyzer, hold the sheath liquid bottle and take it out from the holder as shown in
the figure.

Sheath bottle

Sheath bottle holder

Fig. 10-2-4

Do not force to drag the pipelines and wires.

(3)Open the sheath liquid bottle cover and take out the cover components; protect it with clean zip-lock bag or
plastic film to prevent the pipe joints from being polluted as shown in the figure below:

10-4
 User Manual

Components of sheath bottle

Protecting bag

Fig. 10-2-5

(4)Pour out the rest sheath liquid in the bottle, and clean the bottle with distilled water or sheath liquid.
(5)After cleaning, take out the bottle components and put them in the bottle, then lock the cover and check
whether the pipeline joints are loose (as shown in Fig. 10-2-6); finally reinstall the sheath liquid bottle and install
the right cover plate after confirming all joints are fastened.

Pipe joint

Fig. 10-2-6

10.2.9 Cleanworktable

Click on the interface [Fig. 10-2-1], and the Analyzer enters in the cleaning state. Open the left
front door of the Analyzer, the measuring head will run to the side away from the operator, and the stepping gear
plate will rise to the highest point automatically. Clean the bedplate and stepping gear plate with absorbent cotton
soaked in clean water to clear all impurities on them, and after that wipe to dry the plates.

● Don’t wipe the white benchmark with absorbent cotton dipped in alcohol in case of color change or
scratch of the benchmark and calibration failure of the Analyzer.
● Don’t use hard brush to clean the surface of bedplate to avoid impact on its service life!

10.2.10 Clean refractometer

To avoid the impact of residual in hydrometer on the accuracy of testing results of the Analyzer, the refractometer
shall be cleaned when the refractometer and turbidimeter fail to pass the calibration through the following
methods:
(1)Load the test tube with around 8mL detergent and put it at the emergency position.

(2)Click ”on the interface (Fig. 10-2-1) and the probe will be pushed to the emergency position
and aspirates the detergent for 3 times and 2mL for each time to clean the refractometer and turbidimeter.
10.2.11 Clean pipelines
To avoid the impact of residual in flow cell on the accuracy of testing results of the Analyzer, the pipeline shall be
cleaned every week.

10-5
 User Manual

Click on the“System Maintenance”interface, and the prompt box as below will pop up:

Fig. 10-2-7

Load the test tube with around 5mL detergent and put it in the first position of the test tube rack, then put the rack
on the right side of the sample feeder. Click and the tip “Preparing detergent...” will pop up;then the
test tube will be pushed to the sampling position automatically and the sample-aspirating probe will aspirateabout
2mL detergent, then the hint “About 20 min is necessary for soaking” will pop up.
After cleaning, the system is at the standby state.

10.3 Cleansample-aspirating probe outer wall and waste liquid rinsing bath
To avoid the dust on the surface of sample-aspirating probe that may affect the accuracy of analyzer, the
sample-aspirating probeshould be cleaned every week. First turn off the power of the Analyzer,open the left front
door of the Analyzer, move the sample probe arm to the position above the rinsing bath, use cotton swabs
dipped in alcohol to wipe the outer wall, as shown below:

Sample-aspirating
probe

Waste liquid
rinsing bath

Fig. 10-3-1

After cleaning, no salt crystal should be left on the probe.

To avoid the dust on the surface of or inside the waste liquid rinsing bath that may affect the accuracy of analyzer,
the waste liquid rinsing bath should be cleaned every week.
Cleaning method: clean the inner wall of the rinsing bath with swab dipped in Detergent and at the same time
wipe the upper surface of the waste liquid rinsing bath as shown in the figure:

10-6
 User Manual

rinsing bath

Fig. 10-3-2

10.4 Clean strip table, toothed plate and scraps

The strip table, toothed palte and scraps should be cleaned once a week.
(1)Open the front door of the Analyzer, manually remove the right small door fixing screws, open the right
small door, and use the cross screwdriver to remove the two screws that fix the strip-selecting unit, and
slowly rotate the strip-selecting unit to the outside of the Analyzer with the bottom side as the axis to the
lowest point.

Fig. 10-4-1

(2)Manually remove the fixing screws of the strip table, as shown in the figure:

Fig. 10-4-2

(3)Gently lift the strip table and pull it outwards, and as you pull out, keep the front and back of the strip

10-7
 User Manual

table lifted. During the process of pulling the strip table out, rotate it clockwise until the strip table is taken
out completely; Note: During the process of pulling out, the strip table is blow the strip receiving frame of
the strip-selecting unit, and not in contact with the strip receiving frame.

Fig. 10-4-3

(4)The toothed plate uses the fixing mode of magnetic attraction. Lift the toothed plate horizontally and take
it out.

Fig. 10-4-4

(5)After taking out the strip table and toothed plate, place them on a clean, flat worktable (be careful not to
drop or crash the strip table or toothed plate, preventing deformation or break).
(6)Clean the strip table and toothed plate with absorbent cotton dipped in clear water so that there is no
accumulated material on the strip table and toothed plate (pay attention to the corners and edges of the strip
table), clean and wipe dry (the corners and edges of the strip table shall not be hung with cotton fiber or other
foreign material).
(7)Use a brush to clean the scraps on the strip receiving frame of the strip-selecting unit. Open the strip
sealed bin cover, remove the remaining strips, clean the inside of the strip sealed bin with a brush, ensure that
the roll in the bin is cleaned, then put the strips back, and cover the strip sealed bin well.
(8)Take out the scrap reclaiming box, clear the scraps, and put it back in the original position.

Fig. 10-4-5

10-8
 User Manual

(9)Install the cleaned toothed plate and strip table to the Analyzer in order (the toothed plate and strip table
should be flat without warping). Tighten the fixing screws of the strip table.
(10)Slowly rotate the strip-selecting unit to the initial position. Use the cross screw driver to tighten the two
screws of the strip-selecting unit, close the right small door of the Analyzer and tighten it with fixing screws,
and close the front door of the Analyzer.

● Do not use absorbent cotton dipped in alcohol to wipe white dots, to avoid color change of white dots
or scratch which will result in Analyzer calibration failure.
● Do not use tools like hard brush to wash the surface of the worktable to avoid affecting the life of the
worktable!
● Do not drop or crash the worktable or toothed plate to avoid deformation or break!

10.5 Adjustment of fiber sensor

After cleaning of fiber sensor, if the Analyzer still have false judgment (failed to judge whether there is test tube
on the tube rack), the adjustment shall be conducted by following steps:
(1)Hold “TUNE” and “L/D” simultaneously for at least 5s.
(2)Select “res” by clicking “+ -” as shown in 10-5-1, then press “MODE” key.

Fig. 10-5-1

(3)Select “inie” by clicking “+ -” as shown in 10-5-2, then press “MODE” key.

Fig. 10-5-2

(4)When the screen shows red and green numbers, put one test tube rack at the right side of sample feeder and put
a clean glass test tube at the pipe judging position (no barcode pasted on the test tube); then press “TUNE” and the
screen will display as in Fig. 10-5-3; remove the tube and pressure “TUNE”, and the screen will display as shown
below:

Fig. 10-5-3

Fig. 10-5-4

(5)Press “L/D” to convert the working pattern to “D” pattern.

Use clean glass test tube without barcode pasted on its surface.

10-9
 User Manual

If the problem cannot be solve, please contact the Customer Service Department or the agent of the manufacturer.

10.6 Clean waste liquid tank

(1)Clean or replace the waste liquid tank every month.
(2)Pour out the liquid in the filled waste liquid tank in a timely manner.
(3)As urine is potentially infectious, please take preventive measures during cleaning.
(4)Please handle the waste fluid as per the clinic regulations.

The drainage system shall be in compliance with the local regulations with regard to sewage discharge of
medical institutions.

10.7 Clean optical fiber sensor mirror

In order to avoid misjudgment of the Analyzer due to the dust on the surface on the optical fiber sensor, the optical
fiber sensor of the instrument should be cleaned once a month.
Cleaning method: use clean, dry cotton swabs to wipe the mirror of the fiber sensor.

Fig. 10-7-1

10.8 Cleanscan window of barcode reader

The scan window of the barcode reader should be cleaned once a month to avoid misreading or failure to read a
barcode resulting from dirt and dust on it.
(1)Turn off the power of the Analyzer.
(2)Use clean cotton swabs to wipe the scan window of the barcode reader, as shown below:

Fig. 10-8-1

● The barcode reader of analyzer belongs to Class 2 laser product. Users shall not stare at the laser beam

10-10
 User Manual

according to the alarm mark and protect themselves by turning head around or closing eyes.
● Users shall not look at the laser beam constantly in case of damages to their eyes.
● Turn off the Analyzer before wiping the barcode reader.

10.9 Clean work panel of sample feeding unit and clean counting ball
The work panel of the sample feeding unit and the counting ball should be cleaned once a month.
Clean the work panel of the sample feeding unit and the 2 counting balls with absorbent cotton dipped in clear
water, as shown below:

Fig. 10-9-1

10.10 Clean flow cell

The flow cell will have dust on its surface as exposed to air for a long period, and the background grey scale and
imaging quality will be affected if there is a large volume of dust.
It is recommended to clean the surface of flow cell once the Analyzer is used for half a year.
(1)Insert a cotton swab at the circled position of the figure to clean up the surface of the flow cell (the side far
from the objective lens as shown in Fig. 10-10-1).

Fig. 10-10-1

(2)Turn the manual knob of motor in anticlockwise direction to let the mandril move left till the end, and clean the
surface of flow cell with cotton swab (the side near objective lens as shown in Fig. 10-10-2).

10-11
 User Manual

Fig. 10-10-2

10.11 Clean object lens

In case of high ambient humidity or the temperature of analyzer changed from high to low, the front side of
microscope object lens may have vapor which may affect the quality of images if not being cleared timely.
If the image is still not clear after focusing and calibration for three times, the front side of object leans should be
cleaned with the methods below:
Before opening the cover, the figure is as below:

Embedded
handle

Fig. 10-11-1

Raisethe rear cover of the Analyzer as in the figure:

Fig. 10-11-2

Turn the manual knob of motor in anticlockwise direction to let the mandril move right till the end as shown in the
figure:

10-12
 User Manual

Fig. 10-11-3

Unscrew the object lens in anticlockwise direction as shown in the figure.

Fig. 10-11-4

Wipe the front side of object lens with lens paper, and install it to them original position as shown in the figure.

Fig. 10-11-5

10.12 Replace sample filter net

After long-time use or a large amount of sample testing, big particles (MUCS or viscous secretions, etc.) in
samples may block the sample filter net. Replace according to the method below when the software prompts that
filter net needs replacing:

(1)Click the tab on the “System Maintenance” interface; the “Replace Filter Net” window
pops up.

10-13
 User Manual

Here you cannot click the [OK] button.

(2)As the figure shows, open the left front door of the instrument first; remove the tube connectors on the two
ends of the sample filter net, use one hand to pinch the sample filter net, and use the other hand to turn the tube
connector until the tube connector is separated from the filter.

Fig. 10-12-1

(3)Put a piece of absorbent paper flat on the table, take out one “filter net removing tool” from the accompanying
accessories bag, take out the sample filter net from the part clamp, remove sample filter end A, and insert the
sample filter removing tool into the hole of sample filter end B to push out the sample filter net and make it fall
onto the absorbent paper, as the figure shows:

Fig. 10-12-2

(4)Take a new sample filter net out from the accompanying accessories bag, and install the new sample filter net
to the sample filter. (Sample filter end B should be kept upright to ensure the sample filter net is completely
placed in the groove. Then install sample filter end A to end B.) Put the sample filter assembly in the part clamp,
and connect the tubing connector to sample filter two ends, as the figure shows:

10-14
 User Manual

Fig. 10-12-3

(5)Click the OK button on the popup box on the interface of the host computer, and close the left front door to
finish the replacement of sample filter net.

● When installing the sample filter net, keep sample filter net end B upright to make the filter net located in
the groove. Then install filter net end A to end B. Otherwise the sample filter net will fall off sample filter
end B groove, and get damaged.
● Sample filter end A and sample filter end B should be installed firmly. Otherwise air leak may affect the
test result accuracy.
● To ensure test result accuracy, the sample filter net should be replaced according to the software prompt.

10.13 Replace desiccant of strip sealed bin

When “The humidity of the strip bin is over high” is shown on the screen of the Analyzer, replace the desiccant
according to the following method:
(1)Open the right front door of the Analyzer and upper cover of the strip sealed bin.
(2)Take out the remaining reagent strips, put them in a clean, dry strip bottle, and close tight the cap of the strip
bottle.
(3)Take out desiccant chamber 2. (SeeFig. 10-13-1)

10-15
 User Manual

Desiccant
Desiccant
chamber 1
chamber 2

Fig. 10-13-1

(4)Take 4 bags of desiccant from the accessories, and put 2 bags in desiccant chamber 1 and 2 in desiccant
chamber 2.
(5)Put the reagent strips in the strip sealed bin.
(6)Close the upper cover of the strip sealed bin.
(7)Close the right front door of the Analyzer.

10.14 Cleanstrip sealed bin

After the test of analyzer is stopped as the working volume reaches to 1000, the display will give prompt “Please
clean bedplate and strip sealed bin”.
When screen gives prompt “Please clean the table and strip sealed bin”, conduct cleaning process as per the
methods below:
(1)Open upper cover of strip sealed bin.
(2)Take out the rest strips and put them in clean and dry strip bin, then seal its upper cover well.
(3)Clean the inside of strip sealed bin with brush and keep the bin roll clean (see Fig. 10-14-1).
(4)Cover the strip sealed bin well.
(5)Pull down the baffle at right side of the Analyzer and pull down the strip sealed bin outward.
(6)Clean the inside of roll groove with brush and keep the groove clean (see Fig. 10-14-2).
(7)Right the baffle at right side of the strip sealed bin and analyzer, and seal the upper right cover of analyzer well.

10-16
 User Manual

Fig. 10-14-1 Fig. 10-14-2

10.15 Replaceconsumables
As the piston of injection pump motions all the time during sample-aspirating, cleaning and waste liquid drainage
of the Analyzer, the syringe pump tends to be corrosive after a period of time.
The syringe pump has a service life about 500,000 times, and should be replaced every 12 months in general.
Please contact consumer-service staff for replacement.

10.16 System Information

Click in the main key area and enter in the system maintenance interface, then click tag
to display general information as shown in the figure:

Fig. 10-16-1

10.17 Database backup and recovery

It is recommended to back up the database regularly in case of accidental data loss.Conduct backup and
recovery of database in standby state.
(1)Database backup

Click tag on the interface (Fig. 10-16-1), and the interface as shown in the figure will be
displayed.

10-17
 User Manual

Fig. 10-17-1

Click and the interface is as shown below:

Fig. 10-17-2
Select log path of backup documents (in the disks other than disk C), otherwise the backup documents will be
stored in subfile “backup” of the default installation folder of the software. The file name of database backup is
the current date, and the suffix is *.bak.

After selecting the log path of documents, click in Fig. 10-17-1, and the dialog box below will pop
up:

10-18
 User Manual

Fig. 10-17-3

It is allowed to tick “delete the history data after backup” in the dialog box to select whether to delete the history
data.
Click in the dialog box (Fig. 10-17-3) and the screen will display progress bar “backup is in
progress”; after backup, the dialog box below will pop up:

Fig. 10-17-4

Click , and the database backup is finished.

(2)Database recovery
In case of unexpected software failure, the backup database document can be used to recover the previous data.

Click on the interface (Fig. 10-17-1), select the log path of backup documents, and then
select backup document as per the backup date and time.

Click on the interface (Fig. 10-17-1) and the screen will display progress bar “backup is in progress”;
after backup, the dialog box below will pop up:

Fig. 10-17-5

Click , and the database recovery is finished. After database recovery, the query and printing of data
are available.

Take care that the recovered database will cover the current data.

10-19
 User Manual

10.18 Processing method before stopping analyzer

Take the following measures to stop the Analyzer before maintenance or transportation:
(1)Conduct “Empty pipeline” before stopping the Analyzer and rinse pipelines with distilled water (replace the
sheath liquid in the sheath liquid bottle by distilled water), and finally conduct “Empty pipeline” again. See details
in 10.2.3-Empty pipeline.
(2)Take away the test tube rack on the sample feeder and sheath liquid bottle and waste bottle are rear side of the
Analyzer before carrying.
(3)Keep the Analyzer vertical during carrying and transporting process.
(4)Avoid vibration during carrying, and check and adjust the Analyzer after carrying to make sure it is normal
before use.

Before moving the analyzer, please divide the Analyzer into two parts, host and sample feeding unit.

10.19 Cleaning and maintenance of analyzer

Clean the surface of analyzer regularly to keep it tidy. Wipe the surface with a wet and soft cloth or gauze, dipped
in 75% alcohol of small amount if necessary. Don’t wipe it with any organic solvent in case of damages to the
case.
The operator shall pay attention to the following matters during cleaning.
(1)Take proper disinfection measures in case of hazardous substance leaked on the surface or inside the equipment.
(by wiping with a soft cloth dipped in 75% alcohol of small amount)
(2)Don’t use the detergent or sanitizer with possibility of danger due to chemical reaction with parts or materials
in equipment.
(3)In case of doubts about the compatibility between the sanitizer or detergent and parts or materials in equipment,
please consult the manufacturer or its agent.

10.20 Treatment of wastes

The Analyzer will produce used disposable tube, waste paper, waste samples and other wastes.
According to the national laws and regulations, the wastes shall be disinfected:
(1)Store the used disposable tube and waste strip uniformly in the vessel marked with pollutant and conduct
high-pressure disinfection or high-temperature incineration.
(2)Providing the rest urine sample and waste liquid may involve bacteria, viruses and other infectious substances,
the following measures shall be taken to prevent environmental pollution: add 100mL of 10g/L peracetic acid or
some bleaching powder in a large vessel (like plastic bucket and ceramic pool), then pour out the samples and
waste liquid after each test into the vessel, and maintain the mixing disinfection duration greater than 1h before
discharge.

Please handle the wastes of the Analyzer to prevent potential biological and chemical pollution.

10.21 Processing method for scraping analyzer

Do not abandon the Analyzer randomly after its service life but inform of the manufacturer for recycle.

10-20
 User Manual

Chapter 11 System help

In case of any doubts to the functions and operations during use, the operator can click or press
“F1” at main key area to open system help as shown in the figure below.

Fig. 11-1-1

Click the title name on the interface (Fig. 11-1-1), and the interface will display the details. If the descriptions are
not displayed completely, drag the scroll bar to view the contents.

After reading, click at upper right of the interface to end the help.

11-1
User Manual

11-2
 User Manual

Chapter 12 Transportation and storage

12.1 Transport
The transportation of Analyzer is specified in the contract, during which fierce vibration and extrusion shall be
prevented, also the Analyzer shall be handled gently for loading/unloading.

12.2 Storage
Store the Analyzer indoor that is clean, ventilated, free of chemicals and corrosive gas, and with ambient
temperature of -40℃~55℃ and relative humidity not more than 93%.

12-1
User Manual

12-2
 User Manual

Chapter 13 Troubleshooting

13.1 Overview
This chapter introduces all possible faults of the system, the analysis of fault causes, as well as the relating
handling method.

The analysis result may be incorrect when the samples are tested under failure of the Analyzer.If fault
alarm occurs during analyzing of samples, continue the sample analysis only after troubleshooting.
In case of fault phenomena listed in 13.2 of this chapter before or during use of the Analyzer, conduct
troubleshooting as per the relevant steps; if failed, please contact the Customer Service Department of the
manufacturer.

When alarm occurs, an alarm icon is rotating at the right side of the main key area. Click the icon, and a
dialog box as in the figure will pop up.

Fig. 13-1-1

If to view details of alarm record, click the information bar through mouse, and the detailed description as well as
solution of the alarm will display in the text box below.

If the fault cannot be removed after conducting the methods shown in the software, send the two folders
“system log” and “database” to consumer-service staff of the manufacturer for a rapid solution. The log
paths of the two holders are as below.
● “System log”: the folder “log” of installation directory of the Analyzer, and the default path is
“D:\DIRUI\FUS-3000Plus\log”;

13-1
 User Manual

●“Database”: the default path is “D:\DIRUI\FUS-3000PlusData\”, and the file name is

“FUS-3000Plus.mdf”and “FUS-3000Plus_log.ldf”.

13.2 Faults and troubleshooting

Type of
Alarm code Alarm description Troubleshooting
alarm
1) If the left front door of the device is opened, close the
Caution Instrument front door left front door.
02-00-01-21
level opened 2) If the left front door of the device is not open, please
contact the after-sales personnel.
1) If the sample in the sample tube is sufficient, this alarm
When aspirating a did not affect the test result.
Caution
02-00-10-1A sample, air may be 2) If the alarm occurs during testing, perform cleaning
level
aspirated pipeline maintenance; if not resolved, please contact the
after-sales personnel.
The main control
Caution board’s reading the
02-00-50-1C Please contact after-sales personnel.
level machine temperature
data was abnormal
1)Please replace the desiccant of the strip-selecting
The reagent chamber chamber.
Caution humidity of the 2) After the test is over, remove the test strips and save
02-00-C9-04
level strip-selecting device them separately.
was over high 3)Please contact after-sales personnel if it cannot be
solved.
1)If the sheath liquid tank is empty, first suspend the test,
and when the current test is completed and it prompts the
Caution The sheath liquid tank
02-00-F1-05 standby or the shutdown state, supplement the sheath
level was empty
liquid.
2)If the alarm still occurs, contact after-sales.
It’s detected that the
Partial sample unit was 1)Execute “Reset”.
02-04-00-0d functionstop abnormal when the 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level instrument cleaned the normal or other failure occurs.
test tube rack.
1) Check whether the sample in the sample tube is
sufficient.
2) Check whether air is sucked into the instrument
detergent tube and sheath liquid tube. If the reagent is
Partial Air was aspirated into
insufficient, please replace the reagent.
02-04-02-01 functionstop the sample for 5 times
3) Continue the test after filling the liquid tube.
level consecutively
4) If the alarm occurs when testing water, check the bubble
optocoupler of the sampling tube and its connection; if the
instrument still reports this alarm, please contact the
after-sales personnel.
The command sent by
1)Turn off the instrument. 10 seconds later, turn on the
main control that the
Partial instrument.
probe moves to the
02-04-03-01 functionstop 2)Execute “Reset”.
sample dripping
level 3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
position was not
normal or other failure occurs.
answered
The command sent by 1)Turn off the instrument. 10 seconds later, turn on the
Partial main control that the instrument.
02-04-03-02 functionstop probe moves to the 2)Execute “Reset”.
level rinsing position was 3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
not answered normal or other failure occurs.
The command sent by
1)Turn off the instrument. 10 seconds later, turn on the
main control that the
Partial instrument.
probe moves to the
02-04-06-01 functionstop 2)Execute “Reset”.
sample dripping
level 3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
position was not
normal or other failure occurs.
answered

13-2
 User Manual

Type of
Alarm code Alarm description Troubleshooting
alarm
The strip transporting 1)Turn off the instrument. 10 seconds later, turn on the
Partial command sent by instrument.
02-04-06-02 functionstop main control to the 2)Execute “Reset”.
level strip-transporting unit 3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
was not answered normal or other failure occurs.
The strip placing 1)Turn off the instrument. 10 seconds later, turn on the
Partial command sent by instrument.
02-04-0B-01 functionstop main control to the 2)Execute “Reset”.
level strip selecting unit 3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
was not answered normal or other failure occurs.
The strip selecting 1)Turn off the instrument. 10 seconds later, turn on the
Partial command sent by instrument.
02-04-0B-02 functionstop main control to the 2)Execute “Reset”.
level strip selecting unit 3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
was not answered normal or other failure occurs.
1) Check the strip transporting plate for dirt or water and
wipe it with a clean paper towel.
Partial Chemistry result error
2) Observe whether there is dirt on the tooth plate and
02-04-26-01 functionstop occurred for 3 times
wipe it with a clean paper towel.
level consecutively
3) Restart the test after wiping. If the instrument still
reports this alarm, please contact the after-sales personnel.
The command of 1)Turn off the instrument. 10 seconds later, turn on the
Partial controlling sample instrument.
02-04-26-09 functionstop unit operation sent by 2)Execute “Reset”.
level main control was not 3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
answered normal or other failure occurs.
Partial The sensor of
02-04-50-1C functionstop monitoring the whole Please contact after-sales personnel.
level machine broke down
During testing 1)Check the serial port communication cable.
Partial
multiple consecutive 2)Execute “Reset”.
02-04-51-02 functionstop
test commands were 3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level
received normal or other failure occurs.
During testing 1)Check the serial port communication cable.
Partial
multiple blank test 2)Execute “Reset”.
02-04-51-03 functionstop
commands were 3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level
received normal or other failure occurs.
During testing 1)Check the serial port communication cable.
Partial
multiple consecutive 2)Execute “Reset”.
02-04-51-05 functionstop
test commands were 3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level
received normal or other failure occurs.
During testing
1)Check the serial port communication cable.
Partial multiple tube skipping
2)Execute “Reset”.
02-04-51-06 functionstop commands were
3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level received
normal or other failure occurs.
consecutively
During testing
1)Check the serial port communication cable.
Partial multiple focus
2)Execute “Reset”.
02-04-51-07 functionstop commands were
3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level received
normal or other failure occurs.
consecutively
During filling
1)Check the serial port communication cable.
Partial multiple filling
2)Execute “Reset”.
02-04-51-08 functionstop commands were
3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level received
normal or other failure occurs.
consecutively
1)Check whether there are other alarms.
Partial During focus no
2)Execute “Reset”.
02-04-51-0F functionstop command of the focus
3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level position was received
normal or other failure occurs.

13-3
 User Manual

Type of
Alarm code Alarm description Troubleshooting
alarm
When executing the
instrument 1)Check the serial port communication cable.
Partial
morphology test, no 2)Execute “Reset”.
02-04-51-11 functionstop
command was 3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level
received from the host normal or other failure occurs.
computer
The main control
Partial board received host 1)Execute “Reset”.
02-04-51-12 functionstop computer 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level photographing normal or other failure occurs.
command error
1)Check whether the sheath liquid bottle is empty.
Partial
The sheath liquid 2)Execute “Reset”.
02-04-F1-06 functionstop
bottle was empty 3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level
normal or other failure occurs.
1)If the waste liquid tank is full, clear the waste liquid tank
Partial when the current test is completed and the standby or
The waste liquid tank
02-04-F1-07 functionstop shutdown state is prompted.
was full
level 2)If you still have an alarm, contact the after-sales
personnel.
Partial The rinsing bath was 1)Execute “Reset”.
02-04-F1-08 functionstop full or the rinsing bath 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level float was damaged normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
02-04-F1-10 functionstop Detergent tank empty 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level normal or other failure occurs.
1)Fill the liquid tube after replacing the detergent.
Partial
The detergent tubing 2)Execute “Reset”.
02-04-F1-11 functionstop
was empty 3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level
normal or other failure occurs.
When emptying liquid 1)Check the detergent tank float.
Partial tubing, the main 2)Check the sheath liquid tank float.
02-04-F1-12 functionstop control board detected 3)Check the sheath liquid bottle float.
level that the float status 4)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
was abnormal normal or other failure occurs.
The main control 1)If the device switch is turned on and off artificially,
board detected that the ignore this alarm.
02-08-02-03 Stop level
instrument was 2)If an alarm occurs during the sample test, please contact
powered up again the after-sales personnel.
Main control board 1)Execute “Reset”.
02-08-50-AA Stop level status error occurred, 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
the test stopped normal or other failure occurs.
The host computer 1)Execute “Reset”.
02-08-51-05 Stop level sample test command 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
was not received. normal or other failure occurs.
1)Execute “Reset”.
Sheath liquid
02-08-F1-02 Stop level 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
supplementtimeout
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Execute “Reset”.
The sheath liquid
2)Execute “Fill pipeline”.
02-08-F1-04 Stop level bottle float is
3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
abnormal
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Execute “Reset”.
The waste liquid cell
02-08-F1-08 Stop level 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
was full
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Execute “Reset”.
The waste liquid cell
02-08-F1-09 Stop level 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
float was abnormal
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Execute “Reset”.
Detergent tubing is
02-08-F1-11 Stop level 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
empty
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Execute “Reset”.
Caution The probe triggered
03-00-0C-02 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level anti-collision
normal or other failure occurs.

13-4
 User Manual

Type of
Alarm code Alarm description Troubleshooting
alarm
The probe unit
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
received the command
03-04-01-01 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
under execution
level normal or other failure occurs.
repeatedly
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
The probe unit did not
03-04-01-04 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
have the command
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Probe unit horizontal 1)Execute “Reset”.
03-04-05-00 functionstop motor SPI 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level communication failure normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Probe unit horizontal 1)Execute “Reset”.
03-04-05-01 functionstop motor Y coil open 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level circuit normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Probe unit horizontal 1)Execute “Reset”.
03-04-05-02 functionstop motor X coil open 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level circuit normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Abnormal probe unit 1)Execute “Reset”.
03-04-05-03 functionstop horizontal motor 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level recharge pump normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Over high temperature 1)Execute “Reset”.
03-04-05-04 functionstop of probe unit 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level horizontal motor normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Probe unit horizontal 1)Execute “Reset”.
03-04-05-05 functionstop motor X coil exceeded 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level the limit normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Probe unit horizontal 1)Execute “Reset”.
03-04-05-06 functionstop motor X coil exceeded 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level the limit normal or other failure occurs.
The probe unit’s
Partial receiving the 1)Execute “Reset”.
03-04-05-07 functionstop horizontal motor 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level operation command normal or other failure occurs.
was repeated
Partial Probe unit horizontal 1)Execute “Reset”.
03-04-05-08 functionstop motor curve 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level configuration error normal or other failure occurs.
Probe unit horizontal
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
motor curve
03-04-05-09 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
parameters enabling
level normal or other failure occurs.
error
Probe unit horizontal
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
motor curve
03-04-05-0A functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
parameters enabling
level normal or other failure occurs.
error
The probe horizontal
Partial motor lost steps when 1)Execute “Reset”.
03-04-05-0B functionstop operating from the 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level testing position to the normal or other failure occurs.
emergency position
The probe horizontal
motor lost steps when
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
operating from the
03-04-05-0C functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
sample dripping
level normal or other failure occurs.
position to the rinsing
position
Partial Probe unit vertical 1)Execute “Reset”.
03-04-06-00 functionstop motor SPI 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level communication failure normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Probe unit vertical 1)Execute “Reset”.
03-04-06-01 functionstop motor X coil open 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level circuit normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Probe unit vertical 1)Execute “Reset”.
03-04-06-02 functionstop motor Y coil open 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level circuit normal or other failure occurs.

13-5
 User Manual

Type of
Alarm code Alarm description Troubleshooting
alarm
Partial Abnormal probe unit 1)Execute “Reset”.
03-04-06-03 functionstop vertical motor 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level recharge pump normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Over high temperature 1)Execute “Reset”.
03-04-06-04 functionstop of probe unit vertical 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level motor normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Probe unit vertical 1)Execute “Reset”.
03-04-06-05 functionstop motor X coil exceeded 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level the limit normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Probe unit vertical 1)Execute “Reset”.
03-04-06-06 functionstop motor Y coil exceeded 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level the limit normal or other failure occurs.
The probe unit’s
Partial receiving the 1)Execute “Reset”.
03-04-06-07 functionstop horizontal motor 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level operation command normal or other failure occurs.
was repeated
Partial Probe unit vertical 1)Execute “Reset”.
03-04-06-08 functionstop motor curve 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level configuration error normal or other failure occurs.
Probe unit vertical
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
motor curve
03-04-06-09 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
parameters enabling
level normal or other failure occurs.
error
Probe unit vertical
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
motor curve
03-04-06-0A functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
parameters enabling
level normal or other failure occurs.
error
Partial Probe unit vertical 1)Execute “Reset”.
03-04-06-0B functionstop motor operation step 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level loss normal or other failure occurs.
When the probe unit
Partial horizontal motor was 1)Execute “Reset”.
03-04-08-01 functionstop reset, the zero 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level optocoupler was not normal or other failure occurs.
detected
Probe unit vertical
Partial motor under resetting 1)Execute “Reset”.
03-04-08-02 functionstop was detected not 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level leaving the zero normal or other failure occurs.
optocoupler
When the probe unit
Partial horizontal motor was 1)Execute “Reset”.
03-04-09-01 functionstop reset, the zero 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level optocoupler was not normal or other failure occurs.
detected
Probe unit vertical
Partial motor under resetting 1)Execute “Reset”.
03-04-09-02 function was detected not 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
stop level leaving the zero normal or other failure occurs.
optocoupler
Partial Probe unit horizontal 1)Execute “Reset”.
03-04-0B-01 functionstop motor failed to return 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level to the rinsing position normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Abnormal signal of 1)Execute “Reset”.
03-04-0C-01 functionstop vertical anti-collision 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level optocoupler normal or other failure occurs.
Partial The probe unit 1)Execute “Reset”.
03-04-15-05 functionstop received remote or 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level standard frame normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Probe unit CAN 1)Execute “Reset”.
03-04-15-07 functionstop receiving buffer area 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level overflow normal or other failure occurs.

13-6
 User Manual

Type of
Alarm code Alarm description Troubleshooting
alarm
Inconsecutive
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
sequence number of
03-04-15-08 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
probe unit receiving
level normal or other failure occurs.
packages
The probe control 1)Execute “Reset”.
03-08-40-FF Stop level board command was 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
not answered normal or other failure occurs.
Probe control board 1)Execute “Reset”.
03-08-50-FF Stop level command reply 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
timeout normal or other failure occurs.
Probe control board 1)Execute “Reset”.
03-08-60-FF Stop level command reply 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
timeout normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Syringe pump 1 unit 1)Execute “Reset”.
04-04-15-05 functionstop received remote or 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level standard frame normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Syringe pump 1 unit 1)Execute “Reset”.
04-04-15-07 functionstop CAN receiving buffer 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level area overflow normal or other failure occurs.
Syringe pump 1 unit
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
receiving package
04-04-15-08 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
sequence numbers
level normal or other failure occurs.
were not consecutive
Partial Syringe pump 1 unit 1)Execute “Reset”.
04-04-15-0A functionstop CAN message queue 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level overflow normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Sample dripping 1)Execute “Reset”.
04-04-65-00 functionstop motor SPI 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level communication failure normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Sample dripping 1)Execute “Reset”.
04-04-65-01 functionstop motor X coil open 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level circuit normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Sample dripping 1)Execute “Reset”.
04-04-65-02 functionstop motor Y coil open 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level circuit normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Abnormal sample 1)Execute “Reset”.
04-04-65-03 functionstop dripping motor 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level recharge pump normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Over high temperature 1)Execute “Reset”.
04-04-65-04 functionstop of sample dripping 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level motor normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Sample dripping 1)Execute “Reset”.
04-04-65-05 functionstop motor X coil exceeded 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level the limit normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Sample dripping 1)Execute “Reset”.
04-04-65-06 functionstop motor Y coil exceeded 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level the limit normal or other failure occurs.
Syringe pump 1
Partial unit’sreceiving sample 1)Execute “Reset”.
04-04-65-07 functionstop dripping motor 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level operation command normal or other failure occurs.
was repeated
Partial Sample dripping 1)Execute “Reset”.
04-04-65-08 functionstop motor curve 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level configuration error normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Sample dripping 1)Execute “Reset”.
04-04-65-09 functionstop motor curve 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level configuration error normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Sample dripping 1) Execute “Reset”.
04-04-65-0A functionstop motor curve 2) Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level configuration error normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Sample dripping 1)Execute “Reset”.
04-04-65-0B functionstop motor operation step 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level loss normal or other failure occurs.

13-7
 User Manual

Type of
Alarm code Alarm description Troubleshooting
alarm
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
Rinsing motor SPI
04-04-66-00 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
communication failure
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
Rinsing motor X coil
04-04-66-01 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
open circuit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
Rinsing motor Y coil
04-04-66-02 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
open circuit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
Abnormal rinsing
04-04-66-03 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
motor recharge pump
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
Over high rinsing
04-04-66-04 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
motor temperature
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
Rinsing motor X coil
04-04-66-05 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
exceeded the limit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
Rinsing motor Y coil
04-04-66-06 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
exceeded the limit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Syringe pump 1 unit’s
Partial receiving rinsing 1)Execute “Reset”.
04-04-66-07 functionstop motor operation 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level command was normal or other failure occurs.
repeated
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
Rinsing motor curve
04-04-66-08 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
configuration error
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
Rinsing motor curve
04-04-66-09 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
configuration error
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
Rinsing motor curve
04-04-66-0A functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
configuration error
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
Rinsing motor
04-04-66-0B functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
operation step loss
level normal or other failure occurs.
When the sample
Partial dripping motor was 1)Execute “Reset”.
04-04-6f-01 functionstop reset, the zero 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level optocoupler was not normal or other failure occurs.
detected
Sample dripping
Partial motor under resetting 1)Execute “Reset”.
04-04-6f-02 functionstop was detected not 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level leaving the zero normal or other failure occurs.
optocoupler
When the rinsing
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
motor was reset, the
04-04-6f-03 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
zero optocoupler was
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
not detected
Rinsing motor under
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
resetting was detected
04-04-6f-04 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
not leaving the zero
level normal or other failure occurs.
optocoupler
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
V1 solenoid valve
04-04-83-01 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
short circuit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
V2 solenoid valve
04-04-83-02 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
short circuit
level normal or other failure occurs.

13-8
 User Manual

Type of
Alarm code Alarm description Troubleshooting
alarm
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
V3 solenoid valve
04-04-83-03 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
short circuit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
V15 solenoid valve
04-04-83-04 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
short circuit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
V6 solenoid valve
04-04-83-05 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
short circuit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
V5 solenoid valve
04-04-83-06 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
short circuit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
V8 solenoid valve
04-04-83-07 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
short circuit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
Waste liquid pump
04-04-83-09 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
short circuit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
V9 solenoid valve
04-04-83-0A functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
short circuit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
Waste liquid pump
04-04-83-0B functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
short circuit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
V10 solenoid valve
04-04-83-0C functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
short circuit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
V1 solenoid valve
04-04-83-11 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
open circuit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
V2 solenoid valve
04-04-83-12 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
open circuit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
V3 solenoid valve
04-04-83-13 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
open circuit
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
V15 solenoid valve
04-04-83-14 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
open circuit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
V6 solenoid valve
04-04-83-15 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
open circuit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
V5 solenoid valve
04-04-83-16 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
open circuit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
V8 solenoid valve
04-04-83-17 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
open circuit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
Waste liquid pump
04-04-83-19 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
open circuit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
V9 solenoid valve
04-04-83-1A functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
open circuit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
Waste liquid pump
04-04-83-1B functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
open circuit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
V10 solenoid valve
04-04-83-1C function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
open circuit
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
04-04-BF-01 functionstop Detergent tank empty 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level normal or other failure occurs.

13-9
 User Manual

Type of
Alarm code Alarm description Troubleshooting
alarm
1)If the waste liquid tank is full, clear the waste liquid tank
Partial when the current test is completed and the standby or
The waste liquid tank
04-04-BF-02 functionstop shutdown state is prompted.
was full
level 2)If you still have an alarm, contact the after-sales
personnel.
Partial The rinsing bath was
04-04-BF-03 functionstop full or the rinsing bath Contact after-sales personnel.
level float was damaged
Partial Abnormal sample 1)Execute “Reset”.
04-04-BF-04 functionstop aspirating tubing 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level pressure normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
Abnormal mixing
04-04-BF-05 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
pressure
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
Mixing pressure
04-04-BF-06 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
parameter error
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Syringe pump 1 unit 1)Execute “Reset”.
04-04-c8-01 functionstop did not have the 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level command normal or other failure occurs.
Syringe pump unit
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
received the repeated
04-04-c8-02 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
command which is
level normal or other failure occurs.
under execution
Partial Syringe pump 1 unit 1)Execute “Reset”.
04-04-c8-07 functionstop did not have the 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level command normal or other failure occurs.
The syringe pump 1
1)Execute “Reset”.
control board
04-08-40-FF Stop level 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
command was not
normal or other failure occurs.
answered
Syringe pump 1
1)Execute “Reset”.
control board
04-08-50-FF Stop level 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
command reply
normal or other failure occurs.
timeout
Syringe pump 1
1)Execute “Reset”.
control board
04-08-60-FF Stop level 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
command reply
normal or other failure occurs.
timeout
Partial Syringe pump 2 unit 1)Execute “Reset”.
05-04-15-05 functionstop received remote or 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level standard frame normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Syringe pump 2 unit 1)Execute “Reset”.
05-04-15-07 functionstop CAN buffer area 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level overflow normal or other failure occurs.
Syringe pump unit
Partial CANreceiving 1)Execute “Reset”.
05-04-15-08 functionstop package sequence 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level numbers were not normal or other failure occurs.
consecutive
Partial Syringe pump 2 unit 1)Execute “Reset”.
05-04-15-0A functionstop CAN data queue 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level overflow normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Sheath liquid motor 1)Execute “Reset”.
05-04-65-00 functionstop SPI communication 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level failure normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
Sheath liquid motor X
05-04-65-01 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
coil open circuit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
Sheath liquid motor Y
05-04-65-02 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
coil open circuit
level normal or other failure occurs.

13-10
 User Manual

Type of
Alarm code Alarm description Troubleshooting
alarm
Partial Abnormal sheath 1)Execute “Reset”.
05-04-65-03 functionstop liquid motor recharge 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level pump normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Over high sheath 1)Execute “Reset”.
05-04-65-04 functionstop liquid motor 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level temperature normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
Sheath liquid motor X
05-04-65-05 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
coil exceeded the limit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
Sheath liquid motor Y
05-04-65-06 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
coil exceeded the limit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Syringe pump 2 unit’s
Partial receiving sheath 1)Execute “Reset”.
05-04-65-07 functionstop liquid motor operation 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level command was normal or other failure occurs.
repeated
Partial Sheath liquid motor 1)Execute “Reset”.
05-04-65-08 functionstop curve configuration 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level error normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Sheath liquid motor 1)Execute “Reset”.
05-04-65-09 functionstop curve configuration 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level error normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Sheath liquid motor 1)Execute “Reset”.
05-04-65-0A functionstop curve configuration 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level error normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
Sheath liquid motor
05-04-65-0B functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
operation step loss
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
Sample motor SPI
05-04-66-00 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
communication failure
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
Sample motor X coil
05-04-66-01 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
open circuit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
Sample motor Y coil
05-04-66-02 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
open circuit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
Abnormal sample
05-04-66-03 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
motor recharge pump
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
Over high sample
05-04-66-04 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
motor temperature
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
Sample motor X coil
05-04-66-05 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
exceeded the limit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
Sample motor Y coil
05-04-66-06 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
exceeded the limit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Syringe pump 2
Partial unit’sreceiving sample 1)Execute “Reset”.
05-04-66-07 functionstop motor operation 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level command was normal or other failure occurs.
repeated
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
Sample motor curve
05-04-66-08 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
configuration error
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
Sample motor curve
05-04-66-09 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
configuration error
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
Sample motor curve
05-04-66-0A functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
configuration error
level normal or other failure occurs.

13-11
 User Manual

Type of
Alarm code Alarm description Troubleshooting
alarm
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
Sample motor
05-04-66-0B functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
operation step loss
level normal or other failure occurs.
When the sheath
Partial liquid motor was 1)Execute “Reset”.
05-04-6f-01 functionstop reset, the zero 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level optocoupler was not normal or other failure occurs.
detected
The sheath liquid
Partial motor under resetting 1)Execute “Reset”.
05-04-6f-02 functionstop was detected not 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level leaving the zero normal or other failure occurs.
optocoupler
When the sample
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
motor was reset, the
05-04-6f-03 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
zero optocoupler was
level normal or other failure occurs.
not detected
Sample motor under
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
resetting was detected
05-04-6f-04 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
not leaving the zero
level normal or other failure occurs.
optocoupler
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
V11 solenoid valve
05-04-83-01 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
short circuit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
V12 solenoid valve
05-04-83-02 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
short circuit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
V13 solenoid valve
05-04-83-03 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
short circuit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
V14 solenoid valve
05-04-83-04 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
short circuit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
05-04-83-05 functionstop Fan short circuit 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
V4 solenoid valve
05-04-83-07 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
short circuit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
V7 solenoid valve
05-04-83-08 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
short circuit
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
sheath liquidpump
05-04-83-09 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
short circuit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
sheath liquidpump
05-04-83-0B functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
short circuit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
V11 solenoid valve
05-04-83-11 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
open circuit
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
V12 solenoid valve
05-04-83-12 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
open circuit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
V13 solenoid valve
05-04-83-13 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
open circuit
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
V14 solenoid valve
05-04-83-14 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
open circuit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
05-04-83-15 functionstop Fan open circuit 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level normal or other failure occurs.

13-12
 User Manual

Type of
Alarm code Alarm description Troubleshooting
alarm
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
V4 solenoid valve
05-04-83-17 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
open circuit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
V7 solenoid valve
05-04-83-18 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
open circuit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
Sheath liquid pump
05-04-83-19 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
open circuit
level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
Sheath liquid pump
05-04-83-1B functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
open circuit
level normal or other failure occurs.
1) If the sheath liquid tank is empty, first suspend the test,
Partial and when the current test is completed and it prompts the
The sheath liquid tank
05-04-BF-01 functionstop standby or the shutdown state, supplement the sheath
was empty
level liquid.
2)If the alarm still occurs, contact after-sales.
1)Check whether the sheath liquid bottle is empty.
Partial
The sheath liquid 2)Execute “Reset”.
05-04-BF-02 functionstop
bottle was empty 3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Check whether the sheath liquid bottle is empty.
2)Check the B05-P16 harness and the sheath liquid bottle
Partial The sheath liquid
float.
05-04-BF-03 functionstop bottle float was
3)Execute “Reset”.
level abnormal
4)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
Syringe pump unit did
05-04-c8-01 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
not have the command
level normal or other failure occurs.
Syringe pump 2 unit
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
received the repeated
05-04-c8-02 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
command which is
level normal or other failure occurs.
under execution
Partial Syringe pump 2 unit 1)Execute “Reset”.
05-04-c8-07 functionstop did not have the 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level command normal or other failure occurs.
The syringe pump 2
1)Execute “Reset”.
control board
05-08-40-FF Stop level 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
command was not
normal or other failure occurs.
answered
Syringe pump 2
1)Execute “Reset”.
control board
05-08-50-FF Stop level 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
command reply
normal or other failure occurs.
timeout
Syringe pump 2
1)Execute “Reset”.
control board
05-08-60-FF Stop level 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
command reply
normal or other failure occurs.
timeout
Strip-transporting unit
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
strip-pushing motor’s
06-04-01-02 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
finding zero
level normal or other failure occurs.
optocoupler error
Strip-transporting unit
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
strip-pushing motor’s
06-04-01-03 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
leaving zero
level normal or other failure occurs.
optocoupler error
Strip-transporting unit
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
strip-pushing motor
06-04-01-04 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
SPI communication
level normal or other failure occurs.
check error
Partial Strip-transporting unit 1)Execute “Reset”.
06-04-01-06 functionstop strip-pushing motor X 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level coil open circuit error normal or other failure occurs.

13-13
 User Manual

Type of
Alarm code Alarm description Troubleshooting
alarm
Partial Strip-transporting unit 1)Execute “Reset”.
06-04-01-07 functionstop strip-pushing motor Y 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level coil open circuit error normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Strip-transporting unit 1)Execute “Reset”.
06-04-01-08 functionstop strip-pushing motor 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level recharge pump error normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Strip-transporting unit 1)Execute “Reset”.
06-04-01-09 functionstop strip-pushing motor X 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level coil overcurrent error normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Strip-transporting unit 1)Execute “Reset”.
06-04-01-0A functionstop strip-pushing motor Y 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level coil overcurrent error normal or other failure occurs.
Strip-transporting unit
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
horizontal motor’s
06-04-02-02 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
finding zero
level normal or other failure occurs.
optocoupler error
Strip-transporting unit
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
horizontal motor’s
06-04-02-03 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
leaving zero
level normal or other failure occurs.
optocoupler error
Strip-transporting unit
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
horizontal motor SPI
06-04-02-04 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
communication check
level normal or other failure occurs.
error
Partial Strip-transporting unit 1)Execute “Reset”.
06-04-02-06 functionstop horizontal motor X 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level coil open circuit error normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Strip-transporting unit 1)Execute “Reset”.
06-04-02-07 function horizontal motor Y 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
stop level coil open circuit error normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Strip-transporting unit 1)Execute “Reset”.
06-04-02-08 functionstop horizontal motor 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level recharge pump error normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Strip-transporting unit 1)Execute “Reset”.
06-04-02-09 functionstop horizontal motor X 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level coil overcurrent error normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Strip-transporting unit 1)Execute “Reset”.
06-04-02-0A functionstop horizontal motor Y 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level coil overcurrent error normal or other failure occurs.
Strip-transporting unit
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
vertical motor’s
06-04-03-02 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
finding zero
level normal or other failure occurs.
optocoupler error
Strip-transporting unit
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
vertical motor’s
06-04-03-03 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
leaving zero
level normal or other failure occurs.
optocoupler error
Strip-transporting unit
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
vertical motor SPI
06-04-03-04 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
communication check
level normal or other failure occurs.
error
Partial Strip-transporting unit 1)Execute “Reset”.
06-04-03-06 functionstop vertical motor X coil 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level open circuit error normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Strip-transporting unit 1)Execute “Reset”.
06-04-03-07 functionstop vertical motor Y coil 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level open circuit error normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Strip-transporting unit 1)Execute “Reset”.
06-04-03-08 functionstop vertical motor 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level recharge pump error normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Strip-transporting unit 1)Execute “Reset”.
06-04-03-09 functionstop vertical motor X coil 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level overcurrent error normal or other failure occurs.

13-14
 User Manual

Type of
Alarm code Alarm description Troubleshooting
alarm
Partial Strip-transporting unit 1)Execute “Reset”.
06-04-03-0A functionstop vertical motor Y coil 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level overcurrent error normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Strip-transporting unit 1)Execute “Reset”.
06-04-04-02 functionstop test motor’s finding 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level zero optocoupler error normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Strip-transporting unit 1)Execute “Reset”.
06-04-04-03 functionstop test motor’s leaving 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level zero optocoupler error normal or other failure occurs.
Strip-transporting unit
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
test motor SPI
06-04-04-04 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
communication check
level normal or other failure occurs.
error
Partial Strip-transporting unit 1)Execute “Reset”.
06-04-04-06 functionstop test motor X coil open 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level circuit error normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Strip-transporting unit 1)Execute “Reset”.
06-04-04-07 functionstop test motor Y coil open 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level circuit error normal or other failure occurs.
1) Execute “Reset” after the completion of the machine
Partial Strip-transporting unit
test.
06-04-04-08 functionstop test motor recharge
2) If this problem still occurs when retesting, contact the
level pump error
after-sales personnel.
Partial Strip-transporting unit 1)Execute “Reset”.
06-04-04-09 functionstop test motor X coil 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level overcurrent error normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Strip-transporting unit 1)Execute “Reset”.
06-04-04-0A functionstop test motor Y coil 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level overcurrent error normal or other failure occurs.
Strip-transporting
Partial 1)Clear the strips on the strip table after standby.
unit, during pushing a
06-04-09-01 functionstop 2) If this problem still occurs when retesting, contact the
strip, failed to detect a
level after-sales personnel.
strip (strip lost)
The strip-transporting
Partial unit waste strip
06-04-09-03 functionstop collecting box was 1)Clean up the waste collection box.
level full; please clear in a
timely manner
Strip-transporting
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
mainboard and test
06-04-09-04 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
unit communication
level normal or other failure occurs.
failure
Partial Strip-transporting unit 1)Execute “Reset”.
06-04-09-06 functionstop received the repeated 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level command normal or other failure occurs.
The strip transporting
1)Execute “Reset”.
control
06-08-40-FF Stop level 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
boardcommand was
normal or other failure occurs.
not answered
Strip transporting
1)Execute “Reset”.
control
06-08-50-FF Stop level 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
boardcommand reply
normal or other failure occurs.
timeout
Strip transporting
1)Execute “Reset”.
control
06-08-60-FF Stop level 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
boardcommand reply
normal or other failure occurs.
timeout
Optical unit focus
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
motor during resetting
08-04-01-01 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
failed to detect the
level normal or other failure occurs.
zero optocoupler

13-15
 User Manual

Type of
Alarm code Alarm description Troubleshooting
alarm
Optical unit focus
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
motor during resetting
08-04-01-09 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
did not leave the zero
level normal or other failure occurs.
optocoupler
Partial Optical unit focus 1)Execute “Reset”.
08-04-02-02 functionstop motor SPI 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level communication failure normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Over high temperature 1)Execute “Reset”.
08-04-02-03 functionstop of optical unit focus 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level motor normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Optical unit focus 1)Execute “Reset”.
08-04-02-04 functionstop motor X coil open 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level circuit normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Optical unit focus 1)Execute “Reset”.
08-04-02-05 functionstop motor Y coil open 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level circuit normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Abnormal optical unit 1)Execute “Reset”.
08-04-02-06 functionstop focus motor recharge 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level pump normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Optical unit focus 1)Execute “Reset”.
08-04-02-07 functionstop motor X coil exceeded 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level the limit normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Optical unit focus 1)Execute “Reset”.
08-04-02-08 functionstop motor Y coil exceeded 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level the limit normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
Optical unit focus
08-04-02-0A functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
motor is running
level normal or other failure occurs.
The optical unit’s
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
receiving the
08-04-03-18 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
command is under
level normal or other failure occurs.
execution
The optical unit’s
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
receiving the
08-04-03-19 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
command is under
level normal or other failure occurs.
execution
The optical unit’s
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
receiving the
08-04-03-1A functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
command is under
level normal or other failure occurs.
execution
The optical unit’s
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
receiving the
08-04-03-1B functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
command is under
level normal or other failure occurs.
execution
The optical unit’s
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
receiving the
08-04-03-1C functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
command is under
level normal or other failure occurs.
execution
The optical control 1)Execute “Reset”.
08-08-40-FF Stop level board command was 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
not answered normal or other failure occurs.
Optical control board 1)Execute “Reset”.
08-08-50-FF Stop level command reply 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
timeout normal or other failure occurs.
Optical control board 1)Execute “Reset”.
08-08-60-FF Stop level command reply 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
timeout normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Refractometercontrol 1)Execute “Reset”.
0A-04-02-07 function board CANreceiving 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
stop level buffer area overflow normal or other failure occurs.

13-16
 User Manual

Type of
Alarm code Alarm description Troubleshooting
alarm
The
refractometercontrol
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
board CANreceiving
0A-04-02-08 functionstop 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
package sequence
level normal or other failure occurs.
numbers were not
consecutive
Partial Refractometercontrol 1)Execute “Reset”.
0A-04-02-0A functionstop board received an 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level invalid command normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Cut off electricity, turn on again, and execute “Reset”.
SG laser failure
0A-04-03-01 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
during self-testing
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)ExecuteSG calibration.
The SG test item was
0A-04-03-06 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
not calibrated
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
1)Please use the original standard solution within its shelf
Partial life for calibration.
SG test calibration
0A-04-03-11 function 2)Fill the liquid tube, reset it and recalibrate.
failure
stop level 3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Turn on again and execute “Reset”.
Turbidity laser failure
0A-04-04-02 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
during self-testing
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute turbidity calibration.
The turbidity test item
0A-04-04-07 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
was not calibrated
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
1)Please use the original standard solution within its shelf
Partial life for calibration.
The turbidity test item
0A-04-04-10 function 2)Fill the liquid tube, reset it and recalibrate.
calibration failed
stop level 3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Turn on again and execute “Reset”.
Color sensor failure
0A-04-05-03 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
during self-testing
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute color calibration.
The color test item
0A-04-05-08 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
was not calibrated
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Restart, execute “Reset”, and track light again.
Color sensor light
0A-04-05-13 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
tracking failure
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Refractometercontrol 1)Cut off electricity, turn on again, and execute “Reset”.
0A-04-06-04 function board AD5933 chip 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
stop level failure normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute conductivity calibration.
Conductivity not
0A-04-07-09 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
calibrated
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
1)Please use the original standard solution within its shelf
Partial life for calibration.
Conductivity test item
0A-04-07-12 function 2)Fill the liquid tube, reset it and recalibrate.
calibration failure
stop level 3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
normal or other failure occurs.
When executing the
Partial refractometer cyclic 1)Execute “Reset”.
0A-04-08-15 function test, stop command 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
stop level receivingtimeout normal or other failure occurs.
occurred
When executing the
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
refractometer cyclic
0A-04-08-16 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
test, the number of
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
test times was zero.
1)Check whether the instrument is with a refractometer
Refractometer unit
0A-08-40-FF Stop level module.
communication failure
2)Check CAN harness.

13-17
 User Manual

Type of
Alarm code Alarm description Troubleshooting
alarm
1)Check whether the instrument is with a refractometer
Refractometer unit
0A-08-50-FF Stop level module.
communication failure
2)Check CAN harness.
1)Check whether the instrument is with a refractometer
Refractometer unit
0A-08-60-FF Stop level module.
communication failure
2)Check CAN harness.
Over high humidity of
Caution
0B-00-C9-04 strip-selecting device 1)Replace the desiccant in the strip selecting device.
level
strip chamber
Strip-selecting device
1)Execute “Reset”.
Caution cannot execute the
0B-00-C9-0B 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
level command (command
normal or other failure occurs.
busy)
Strip-selecting device
1)Re-track the light according to the light tracking method
Caution did not track light;
0B-00-C9-0C of the strip selecting device of the instructions for use.
level light needs tracking
2)Contact after-sales personnel.
again
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
0B-04-15-07 function Buffer area overflow 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial The receiving package 1)Execute “Reset”.
0B-04-15-08 function sequence numbers 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
stop level were not consecutive normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
CAN did not receive
0B-04-15-09 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
data
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
CAN received that the
0B-04-15-0A function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
message queue is full
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Strip-selecting device 1)Execute “Reset”.
0B-04-65-00 function M1 motor drive chip 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
stop level error normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Strip-selecting device 1)Execute “Reset”.
0B-04-65-01 function strip-placing motor X 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
stop level coil open circuit error normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Strip-selecting device 1)Execute “Reset”.
0B-04-65-02 function strip-placing motor Y 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
stop level coil open circuit error normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Strip-selecting device 1)Execute “Reset”.
0B-04-65-03 function strip-placing motor 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
stop level recharge pump error normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Strip-selecting device 1)Execute “Reset”.
0B-04-65-04 function strip-placing motor 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
stop level overheat error normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Strip-selecting device 1)Execute “Reset”.
0B-04-65-05 function strip-placing motor X 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
stop level coil overcurrent error normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Strip-selecting device 1)Execute “Reset”.
0B-04-65-06 function strip-placing motor Y 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
stop level coil overcurrent error normal or other failure occurs.
Strip-selecting device
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
strip-placing motor
0B-04-65-07 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
SPI communication
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
check error
Partial Strip-selecting device 1)Execute “Reset”.
0B-04-65-10 function M2 motor drive chip 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
stop level error normal or other failure occurs.
Strip-selecting device
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
strip-selecting motor
0B-04-65-11 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
X coil open circuit
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
error

13-18
 User Manual

Type of
Alarm code Alarm description Troubleshooting
alarm
Strip-selecting device
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
strip-selecting motor
0B-04-65-12 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
Y coil open circuit
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
error
Partial Strip-selecting device 1)Execute “Reset”.
0B-04-65-13 function strip-selecting motor 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
stop level recharge pump error normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Strip-selecting device 1)Execute “Reset”.
0B-04-65-14 function strip-selecting motor 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
stop level overheat error normal or other failure occurs.
Strip-selecting device
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
strip-selecting motor
0B-04-65-15 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
X coil overcurrent
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
error
Strip-selecting device
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
strip-selecting motor
0B-04-65-16 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
Y coil overcurrent
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
error
Strip-selecting device
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
strip-selecting motor
0B-04-65-17 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
SPI communication
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
check error
Strip-selecting device
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
strip-placing motor’s
0B-04-6F-01 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
finding zero
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
optocoupler error
Strip-selecting device
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
strip-placing motor’s
0B-04-6F-02 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
leaving zero
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
optocoupler error
Strip-selecting device
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
strip-selecting motor’s
0B-04-6F-03 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
finding zero
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
optocoupler error
Strip-selecting device
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
strip-selecting motor’s
0B-04-6F-04 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
leaving zero
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
optocoupler error
In the strip-selecting
device, the strip was
stuck. Probably
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
because the block
0B-04-C9-01 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
peeled off. Take out
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
the strips from the
strip chamber and
reset.
The strip-selecting
Partial 1)Add a test strip.
device strip chamber
0B-04-C9-02 function 2)If there is a strip in the test strip chamber, remove the
has no strip or failed
stop level test strip and put it neatly.
to select a strip.
Over high
Partial 1)Re-track the light according to the light tracking method
strip-selecting unit
0B-04-C9-05 function of the strip selecting device of the instructions for use.
light tracking
stop level 2)Contact after-sales personnel.
adjustment gain
Strip-selecting device
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
failed to detect a valid
0B-04-C9-06 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
encoder signal
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
(encoder abnormal)
Strip-selecting device
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
received an
0B-04-C9-07 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
unrecognizable
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
command

13-19
 User Manual

Type of
Alarm code Alarm description Troubleshooting
alarm
Strip-selecting device
Partial
temperature humidity 1)When the alarm is continued, please contact the
0B-04-C9-09 function
sensor communication after-sales personnel for processing.
stop level
error
Strip-selecting device
Partial strip selecting main 1)Execute “Reset”.
0B-04-C9-0A function roller cannot be 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
stop level enabled (main roller normal or other failure occurs.
stuck)
The strip selecting
1)Execute “Reset”.
control board
0B-08-40-FF Stop level 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
command was not
normal or other failure occurs.
answered
Strip selecting control 1)Execute “Reset”.
0B-08-50-FF Stop level board command reply 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
timeout normal or other failure occurs.
Strip selecting control 1)Execute “Reset”.
0B-08-60-FF Stop level board command reply 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
timeout normal or other failure occurs.
1)Clear the test tube rack in the reclaiming area.
The test tube rack in
Caution 2)Execute “Reset”.
0D-00-0A-9B the reclaiming area
level 3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
was full
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Place the test tube rack in the wait-for-test area and start
Caution The wait-for-test area the test.
0D-00-0A-9E
level had no test tube rack 2)If there is a test tube rack, and the error is still reported,
contact the after-sales personnel.
Sample feeder
Partial 1)Cut off electricity, turn on again, and execute “Reset”.
rack-feeding motor
0D-04-0A-14 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
SPI communication
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
failure
Partial Over high sample 1)Execute “Reset”.
0D-04-0A-15 function feeder rack-feeding 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
stop level motor temperature normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Sample feeder 1)Execute “Reset”.
0D-04-0A-16 function rack-feeding motor X 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
stop level coil open circuit error normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Sample feeder 1)Execute “Reset”.
0D-04-0A-17 function rack-feeding motor Y 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
stop level coil open circuit error normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Abnormal sample 1)Execute “Reset”.
0D-04-0A-18 function feeder rack-feeding 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
stop level motor recharge pump normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Sample feeder 1)Execute “Reset”.
0D-04-0A-19 function rack-feeding motor X 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
stop level coil exceeded the limit normal or other failure occurs.
Partial Sample feeder 1)Execute “Reset”.
0D-04-0A-1A function rack-feeding motor Y 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
stop level coil exceeded the limit normal or other failure occurs.
Sample feeder
Partial 1)Cut off electricity, turn on again, and execute “Reset”.
rack-conveying motor
0D-04-0A-1B function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
SPI communication
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
failure
Partial Over high sample 1)Execute “Reset”.
0D-04-0A-1C function feeder rack-conveying 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
stop level motor temperature normal or other failure occurs.
Sample feeder
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
rack-conveying motor
0D-04-0A-1D function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
X coil open circuit
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
error
Sample feeder
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
rack-conveying motor
0D-04-0A-1F function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
Y coil open circuit
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
error

13-20
 User Manual

Type of
Alarm code Alarm description Troubleshooting
alarm
Partial Abnormal sample 1)Execute “Reset”.
0D-04-0A-20 function feeder rack-conveying 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
stop level motor recharge pump normal or other failure occurs.
Sample feeder
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
rack-conveying motor
0D-04-0A-21 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
X coil exceeded the
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
limit
Sample feeder
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
rack-conveying motor
0D-04-0A-22 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
Y coil exceeded the
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
limit
Abnormal sample
Partial 1)Cut off electricity, turn on again, and execute “Reset”.
feeder
0D-04-0A-23 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
rack-withdrawing
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
motor drive
Over high sample
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
feeder
0D-04-0A-24 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
rack-withdrawing
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
motor temperature
Sample feeder
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
rack-withdrawing
0D-04-0A-25 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
motor X coil open
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
circuit error
Sample feeder
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
rack-withdrawing
0D-04-0A-26 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
motor X coil open
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
circuit error
Abnormal sample
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
feeder
0D-04-0A-27 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
rack-withdrawing
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
motor recharge pump
Sample feeder
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
rack-withdrawing
0D-04-0A-28 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
motor X coil exceeded
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
the limit
Sample feeder
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
rack-withdrawing
0D-04-0A-29 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
motor Y coil exceeded
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
the limit
1)Check whether there is a test tube in the emergency test
tube position and make sure that the emergency test tube
Partial
No emergency test has been placed on the emergency rack.
0D-04-0A-82 function
tube 2)After turning on the instrument again, execute “Reset”.
stop level
3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
normal or other failure occurs.
Sample feeder
Partial rack-feeding motor 1)Execute “Reset”.
0D-04-0A-91 function during operation 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
stop level failed to detect the normal or other failure occurs.
zero position signal
Abnormal signal of
rack-feeding motor
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
bijectionoptocoupler
0D-04-0A-92 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
or rack feeding
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
in-position
optocoupler
After sample feeder
rack conveying action,
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
it’s detected that the
0D-04-0A-93 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
signal of the right
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
count ball was
abnormal

13-21
 User Manual

Type of
Alarm code Alarm description Troubleshooting
alarm
After sample feeder
Partial rack conveying action, 1)Execute “Reset”.
0D-04-0A-94 function it’s detected that the 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
stop level signal of the left count normal or other failure occurs.
ball was abnormal
Sample feeder
Partial rack-conveying motor 1)Execute “Reset”.
0D-04-0A-95 function during operation 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
stop level failed to detect the normal or other failure occurs.
zero position signal
Sample feeder during
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
rack conveying failed
0D-04-0A-96 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
to detect right count
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
ball signal change
Sample feeder during
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
rack conveying failed
0D-04-0A-97 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
to detect left count
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
ball signal change
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
The test tube rack was
0D-04-0A-98 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
moved
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
Sample feeder
rack-withdrawing
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
motor during
0D-04-0A-99 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
operation failed to
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
detect the zero
position signal
Sample feeder
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
rack-withdrawing
0D-04-0A-9A function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
motor failed to leave
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
the zero optocoupler
The test tube racks in
Partial
the sample feeder
0D-04-0A-9B function 1)Clear the test tube rack in the reclaiming area.
reclaiming area were
stop level
full
Partial
The wait-for-test area
0D-04-0A-9E function 1)Place the test tube rack and start the test.
had no test tube rack
stop level
1)When performing a sample test, make sure there is a test
Partial tube on the test tube rack.
No test tube in the test
0D-04-0A-9F function 2)Execute “Reset”.
tube rack
stop level 3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
normal or other failure occurs.
Partial The number of back
0D-04-0A-A1 function tests was not in the 1)Contact the after-sales personnel.
stop level range of 1 —10
Partial 1)Check whether the tube on the test tube rack has been
No test tube in the
0D-04-0A-A3 function moved.
back test position
stop level 2)Contact the after-sales personnel.
When the pre-storage 1)Check the status of the pre-storage tray rack feeding
Partial tray fed a rack, the switch.
0D-04-A1-01 function signal of the rack 2)Execute “Reset”.
stop level feeding detection 3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
switch was abnormal normal or other failure occurs.
1)Check whether there is a test tube rack in the pre-storage
tray wait-for-test area, and make sure there is a test tube
Partial
Pre-storage tray had rack.
0D-04-A1-02 function
no test tube rack 2)Execute “Reset”.
stop level
3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
normal or other failure occurs.

13-22
 User Manual

Type of
Alarm code Alarm description Troubleshooting
alarm
The number of the
Partial steps set for the 1)Execute “Reset”.
0D-04-A1-13 function pre-storage tray 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
stop level rack-delivering motor normal or other failure occurs.
was too large
The number of the
Partial steps set for the 1)Execute “Reset”.
0D-04-A1-14 function pre-storage tray 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
stop level rack-feeding motor normal or other failure occurs.
was too large
Partial Abnormal pre-storage 1)Execute “Reset”.
0D-04-A1-15 function tray rack-out 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
stop level optocoupler normal or other failure occurs.
1)The sample test mode is set to online mode.
2)Check the connection signal wire between the
pre-storage tray and the sample feeding unit to ensure
Partial good contact.
Pre-storage tray not
0D-04-A1-16 function 3)When using the online mode, make sure the pre-storage
on line
stop level tray power switch is turned on.
4)Execute “Reset”.
5)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Check the pre-storage tray power switch.
2)Check the harness between the pre-storage tray and
Partial
Pre-storage tray sample feeding unit.
0D-04-A1-17 function
resetting timeout 3)Execute “Reset”.
stop level
4)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Check the pre-storage tray power switch.
2)Check the harness between the pre-storage tray and
Partial Pre-storage tray’s
sample feeding unit.
0D-04-A1-18 function reading the version
3)Execute “Reset”.
stop level number timeout
4)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Check the pre-storage tray power switch.
2)Check the harness between the pre-storage tray and
Partial Pre-storagetray’s
sample feeding unit.
0D-04-A1-19 function preparing the test
3)Execute “Reset”.
stop level tubetimeout
4)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Check the pre-storage tray power switch.
2)Check the harness between the pre-storage tray and
Partial Pre-storage tray
sample feeding unit.
0D-04-A1-1A function rack-pushing motor
3)Execute “Reset”.
stop level rack feeding timeout
4)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Check the pre-storage tray power switch.
Pre-storage tray 2)Check the harness between the pre-storage tray and
Partial
rack-delivering motor sample feeding unit.
0D-04-A1-1B function
rack transporting 3)Execute “Reset”.
stop level
timeout 4)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Check the pre-storage tray power switch.
Pre-storage tray’s 2)Check the harness between the pre-storage tray and
Partial
reading the sample feeding unit.
0D-04-A1-1C function
optocoupler status 3)Execute “Reset”.
stop level
timeout 4)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Check the pre-storage tray power switch.
2)Check the harness between the pre-storage tray and
Partial Pre-storage tray
sample feeding unit.
0D-04-A1-1D function rack-pushing motor
3)Execute “Reset”.
stop level operation timeout
4)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
normal or other failure occurs.

13-23
 User Manual

Type of
Alarm code Alarm description Troubleshooting
alarm
1)Check the pre-storage tray power switch.
2)Check the harness between the pre-storage tray and
Partial Pre-storage tray
sample feeding unit.
0D-04-A1-1E function rack-delivering motor
3)Execute “Reset”.
stop level operation timeout
4)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
normal or other failure occurs.
Reclaiming tray entry
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
optocoupler failed to
0D-04-A5-01 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
sensor the test tube
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
rack
Reclaiming tray test
Partial tube rack in-position 1)Execute “Reset”.
0D-04-A5-02 function optocoupler detected a 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
stop level test tube rack all the normal or other failure occurs.
time
When the reclaiming
tray reclaimed the test
Partial tube rack, the 1)Execute “Reset”.
0D-04-A5-03 function in-position 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
stop level optocoupler failed to normal or other failure occurs.
detect the test tube
rack
The reclaiming tray
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
entry optocoupler
0D-04-A5-04 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
detected a test tube
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
rack all the time
1)Check whether the optocoupler in the reclaiming stop
Partial The test tube racks in zone is blocked, and make sure there is no blockage.
0D-04-A5-05 function the reclaiming tray 2)Execute “Reset”.
stop level stop area were full 3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Check the set number of steps of reclaiming tray
The number of steps
Partial rack-withdrawing motor.
set for the reclaiming
0D-04-A5-1F function 2)Execute “Reset”.
tray rack-withdrawing
stop level 3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
motor was over large
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Check the set number of steps of reclaiming tray
The number of steps
Partial rack-delivering motor.
set for the reclaiming
0D-04-A5-20 function 2)Execute “Reset”.
tray rack-delivering
stop level 3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
motorwas over large
normal or other failure occurs.
1) The mode setting is incorrect.
2) The reclaiming tray power switch is not turned on.
Partial 3) Check theharness between the pre-storage tray and the
Reclaiming tray not
0D-04-A5-21 function sample feeding unit, and ensure that the contact is good.
on line
stop level 4)Execute “Reset”.
5)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Check the power switch of the reclaiming tray.
2)Check the harness between the reclaiming tray and
Partial
Reclaiming tray sample feeding unit.
0D-04-A5-22 function
resetting timeout 3)Execute “Reset”.
stop level
4)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Check the power switch of the reclaiming tray.
2)Check the harness between the reclaiming tray and
Partial Reclaiming tray’s
sample feeding unit.
0D-04-A5-23 function reading the version
3)Execute “Reset”.
stop level number timeout
4)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
normal or other failure occurs.

13-24
 User Manual

Type of
Alarm code Alarm description Troubleshooting
alarm
1)Check the power switch of the reclaiming tray.
2)Check the harness between the reclaiming tray and
Partial Reclaiming tray’s
sample feeding unit.
0D-04-A5-24 function reclaiming the test
3)Execute “Reset”.
stop level tube rack timeout
4)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Check the power switch of the reclaiming tray.
2)Check the harness between the reclaiming tray and
Partial Reclaiming tray’s
sample feeding unit.
0D-04-A5-25 function reading the receiving
3)Execute “Reset”.
stop level optocouplertimeout
4)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Check the power switch of the reclaiming tray.
Reclaiming tray’s 2)Check the harness between the reclaiming tray and
Partial
reading the sample feeding unit.
0D-04-A5-26 function
optocoupler status 3)Execute “Reset”.
stop level
timeout 4)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Check the power switch of the reclaiming tray.
Reclaiming tray 2)Check the harness between the reclaiming tray and
Partial
rack-withdrawing sample feeding unit.
0D-04-A5-27 function
motor operation 3)Execute “Reset”.
stop level
timeout 4)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Check the power switch of the reclaiming tray.
2)Check the harness between the reclaiming tray and
Partial Reclaiming tray
sample feeding unit.
0D-04-A5-28 function rack-delivering motor
3)Execute “Reset”.
stop level operation timeout
4)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
normal or other failure occurs.
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
26-04-B0-04 function Busy testing head task 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
1)Check the white block under the testing head for dirt or
When the chemistry
damage and wipe it with a cotton swab with water.
Partial testing board tracked
2)After wiping, cut off electricity, turn on the power and
26-04-B0-10 function light,the gain of the
execute reset.
stop level 1st circuit lamp
3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
exceeded the limit
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Check the white block under the testing head for dirt or
When the chemistry
damage and wipe it with a cotton swab with water.
Partial testing board tracked
2)After wiping, cut off electricity, turn on the power and
26-04-B0-11 function light,the gain of the
execute reset.
stop level 2nd circuit lamp
3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
exceeded the limit
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Check the white block under the testing head for dirt or
When the chemistry
damage and wipe it with a cotton swab with water.
Partial testing board tracked
2)After wiping, cut off electricity, turn on the power and
26-04-B0-12 function light,the gain of the
execute reset.
stop level 3rd circuit lamp
3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
exceeded the limit
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Check the white block under the testing head for dirt or
When the chemistry
damage and wipe it with a cotton swab with water.
Partial testing board tracked
2)After wiping, cut off electricity, turn on the power and
26-04-B0-13 function light,the gain of the
execute reset.
stop level 4th circuit lamp
3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
exceeded the limit
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Check the white block under the testing head for dirt or
When the chemistry
damage and wipe it with a cotton swab with water.
Partial testing board tracked
2)After wiping, cut off electricity, turn on the power and
26-04-B0-14 function light,the gain of the
execute reset.
stop level 5th circuit lamp
3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
exceeded the limit
normal or other failure occurs.

13-25
 User Manual

Type of
Alarm code Alarm description Troubleshooting
alarm
1)Check the white block under the testing head for dirt or
When the chemistry
damage and wipe it with a cotton swab with water.
Partial testing board tracked
2)After wiping, cut off electricity, turn on the power and
26-04-B0-15 function light,the gain of the
execute reset.
stop level 6th circuit lamp
3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
exceeded the limit
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Check the white block under the testing head for dirt or
When the chemistry
damage and wipe it with a cotton swab with water.
Partial testing board tracked
2)After wiping, cut off electricity, turn on the power and
26-04-B0-16 function light,the gain of the
execute reset.
stop level 7th circuit lamp
3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
exceeded the limit
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Check the white block under the testing head for dirt or
When the chemistry
damage and wipe it with a cotton swab with water.
Partial testing board tracked
2)After wiping, cut off electricity, turn on the power and
26-04-B0-17 function light,the gain of the
execute reset.
stop level 8th circuit lamp
3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
exceeded the limit
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Check the white block under the testing head for dirt or
When the chemistry
damage and wipe it with a cotton swab with water.
Partial testing board executed
2)After wiping, cut off electricity, turn on the power and
26-04-B0-18 function a test, the test value of
execute reset.
stop level the 1st group of lamps
3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
was over high
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Check the white block under the testing head for dirt or
When the chemistry
damage and wipe it with a cotton swab with water.
Partial testing board executed
2)After wiping, cut off electricity, turn on the power and
26-04-B0-19 function a test, the test value of
execute reset.
stop level the 2nd group of
3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
lamps was over high
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Check the white block under the testing head for dirt or
When the chemistry
damage and wipe it with a cotton swab with water.
Partial testing board executed
2)After wiping, cut off electricity, turn on the power and
26-04-B0-1a function a test, the test value of
execute reset.
stop level the 3rd group of
3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
lamps was over high
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Check the white block under the testing head for dirt or
When the chemistry
damage and wipe it with a cotton swab with water.
Partial testing board executed
2)After wiping, cut off electricity, turn on the power and
26-04-B0-1B function a test, the test value of
execute reset.
stop level the 4th group of lamps
3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
was over high
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Check the white block under the testing head for dirt or
When the chemistry
damage and wipe it with a cotton swab with water.
Partial testing board executed
2)After wiping, cut off electricity, turn on the power and
26-04-B0-1c function a test, the test value of
execute reset.
stop level the 1st group of lamps
3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
was over low
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Check the white block under the testing head for dirt or
When the chemistry
damage and wipe it with a cotton swab with water.
Partial testing board executed
2)After wiping, cut off electricity, turn on the power and
26-04-B0-1d function a test, the test value of
execute reset.
stop level the 2nd group of
3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
lamps was over low
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Check the white block under the testing head for dirt or
When the chemistry
damage and wipe it with a cotton swab with water.
Partial testing board executed
2)After wiping, cut off electricity, turn on the power and
26-04-B0-1e function a test, the test value of
execute reset.
stop level the 3rd group of
3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
lamps was over low
normal or other failure occurs.

13-26
 User Manual

Type of
Alarm code Alarm description Troubleshooting
alarm
1)Check the white block under the testing head for dirt or
When the chemistry
damage and wipe it with a cotton swab with water.
Partial testing board executed
2)After wiping, cut off electricity, turn on the power and
26-04-B0-1f function a test, the test value of
execute reset.
stop level the 4th group of lamps
3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
was over low
normal or other failure occurs.
1) Check whether there is a bright light source in the test
environment.
Partial The ambient light of
2)After confirming there is no light source, execute
26-04-B0-20 function the chemistry testing
“Reset”.
stop level board was over bright
3)Reset. Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Check the white block under the testing head for dirt or
The white benchmark damage and wipe it with a cotton swab with water.
Partial
reflectivity of the 2)After wiping, carry out light tracking testing and start the
26-04-B0-21 function
chemistry test unit test again.
stop level
was low 3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Check the white block under the testing head for dirt or
The white benchmark damage and wipe it with a cotton swab with water.
Partial
reflectivity of the 2)After wiping, carry out light tracking testing and start the
26-04-B0-22 function
chemistry test unit test again.
stop level
was high 3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Check the strip transporting plate for dirt or water and
wipe it with a clean paper towel.
Partial
2)Observe whether there is dirt on the tooth plate and wipe
26-04-B0-23 function The strip tilted
it with a clean paper towel.
stop level
3)Restart the test after wiping. If the instrument still
reports this alarm, please contact the after-sales personnel.
1)Check whether the sample in the sample tube is
sufficient.
2)Check whether air is sucked into the instrument
Partial
Insufficient sample detergent tube and sheath liquid tube. If the reagent is
26-04-B0-24 function
dripping onto the strip insufficient, please replace the reagent.
stop level
3)Continue the test after filling the liquid tube.
4)If the instrument still reports this alarm, please contact
the after-sales personnel.
The chemistry testing
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
board failed to detect
26-04-B0-27 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
a strip in the testing
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
position
1)Check the strip transporting plate for dirt or water and
Partial
The strip was turned wipe it with a clean paper towel.
26-04-B0-28 function
over 2)Restart the test after wiping. If the instrument still
stop level
reports this alarm, please contact the after-sales personnel.
Testing head
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
configuration
26-04-B0-29 function 2)Reset. Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
parameter error during
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
BD testing
1)Check the white block under the testing head for dirt or
When the chemistry
damage and wipe it with a cotton swab with water.
Partial testing board tracked
2)After wiping, cut off electricity, turn on the power and
26-04-B0-30 function light,the gain of the
execute reset.
stop level 9th circuit lamp
3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
exceeded the limit
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Check the white block under the testing head for dirt or
When the chemistry
damage and wipe it with a cotton swab with water.
Partial testing board tracked
2)After wiping, cut off electricity, turn on the power and
26-04-B0-31 function light,the gain of the
execute reset.
stop level 10th circuit lamp
3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
exceeded the limit
normal or other failure occurs.

13-27
 User Manual

Type of
Alarm code Alarm description Troubleshooting
alarm
1)Check the white block under the testing head for dirt or
When the chemistry
damage and wipe it with a cotton swab with water.
Partial testing board executed
2)After wiping, cut off electricity, turn on the power and
26-04-B0-32 function a test, the test value of
execute reset.
stop level the 5th group of lamps
3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
was over high
normal or other failure occurs.
1)Check the white block under the testing head for dirt or
When the chemistry
damage and wipe it with a cotton swab with water.
Partial testing board executed
2)After wiping, cut off electricity, turn on the power and
26-04-B0-33 function a test, the test value of
execute reset.
stop level the 5th group of lamps
3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
was over low
normal or other failure occurs.
When the chemistry
Partial testing board executed 1)Please use the original standard strip for testing.
26-04-B0-34 function BD testing, error in 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
stop level the standard strip type normal or other failure occurs.
occurred
1)Check the white block under the testing head for dirt or
When the chemistry damage and wipe it with a cotton swab with water.
Partial
testing board was 2)After wiping, cut off electricity, turn on the power and
26-04-B0-35 function
adjusted, the gain was execute reset.
stop level
over high 3)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
normal or other failure occurs.
When the host
computer configured
Partial 1)Execute “Reset”.
the strip type of the
26-04-B0-36 function 2)Contact after-sales personnel if it cannot return to
chemistry testing
stop level normal or other failure occurs.
board, error in
parameters occurred

13-28
 User Manual

Appendix A Processing method for software sleep

The Analyzer is driven by the upper computer through the serial port, and it may have blue screen under standby
or sleep state. To avoid this phenomenon, the standby and sleep functions are prohibited. The specific operating
procedure is as below:
Enter control panel, as shown below:

Fig.A-1

Enter the “Power Options” interface, as shown below:

Fig.A-2

Click to select “Balanced (recommended)”, then click “Change plan settings”, set “Turn off the display” to
“Never”, as shown below:

A-1
User Manual

Fig.A-3

A-2
 User Manual

Appendix B FUS-3000Plus Urinalysis Hybrid Host Interface Specification

(Serial Port)
The manual provides communication Protocol between the Analyzer and LIS (the host).
1. General
The manual describes the necessary information for mutual communication between the Analyzer and LIS. For
more details, please refer to ASTM standards.
1.1 Definitions
E1381-LLP for message transfer between clinical laboratory and LIS, E1381-91 standard
E1394-keyword protocol for message transfer between clinical laboratory and LIS, E1394-91 standard
Frame-Data transfer unit of E1381 standard
Host-the LIS computer that is connected with the Urinalysis Hybrid
Instrument-the Urinalysis Hybrid that is connected with the LIS
Message-a group of information about the same patient, comprising many records which shall be transferred at the
same time
Zero-“zero field” refers to the field without data and expressed by two field separators “||”; and “zero element” is
same to “zero field” except that the element decollator is “^”.
Text-displayable character set, including ASCII characters of decimal system from 32 to 126
1.2 ASTM standard
The Urinalysis Hybrid makes use of ASTM standard to realize communication between clinical laboratory and
LIS.
The following documents are employed
Keyword protocol for message transfer between clinical laboratory and LIS, E1394-91 standard, ASTM standard
yearbook, Vol.14.01, and ASTM.
LLP for message transfer between clinical laboratory and LIS, E1381-91 standard, ASTM standard yearbook,
Vol.14.01, and ASTM.
1.3 Port setting
Conduct port setting during setting the dialog box
Baud rate
The user can select Baud rate among 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 and 115200, and the default value is 115200.
Data bit
The user can set the data bit as 7 or 8, and the default value is 8.
Parity checking
The user can select parity check or no check, and the default is no check.
Stop bit
The user can set the stop bit as 1 or 2, and the default is 1. The start bit is always 1.
1.4 Transmission mode
None.
The Analyzer does not communicate with LIS.
Two-way communication
1.4.1 The user can make a request to LIS server manually, including base data like name and age of the patient.
1.4.2 The Analyzer will send the test results to LIS server manually or automatically.
1.5 Hardware interface

B-1
 User Manual

Cable
The Urinalysis Hybrid is connected with LIS through standard RS-232-C 9 needle adapter.
Cable length
The cable shall not be more than 12m.
1.6 General terms relating to LIS
1.6.1 Control code
LF (line feed) (Hex 0A)
CR (carriage return) (Hex 0D)
STX (text start) (Hex 02)
ETX (text end) (Hex 03)
EOT (transfer end) (Hex 04)
ENQ (query) (Hex 05)
ACK (answer) (Hex 06)
NAK (no answer) (Hex 15)
1.6.2 Message frame/check sum
frame
Message is transferred in the form of frame and each one at most includes 247 characters (including start/end
characters). The message with more than 240 characters is divided into two or more frames. There two kinds of
frames: intermediate frame and end frame. The intermediate frame ends with character <ETB>, checksum, <CR>
and <LF>. The end frame ends with <ETX>, checksum, <CR> and <LF>. One end frame is used for transfer.
Long frames are transmitted via inbetween, and the last part of the message is transmitted via an end frame.
The results of frames are shown below:
Inbetween: <STX> FN text <ETB> CH CL <CR><LF>
End frame: <STX> FN text <ETX> CH CL <CR><LF>
Here:
<STX>=start-of-text control character, ASCII code 0x02
FN=singular frame codes from 0 to 7
Text=message content
<ETB>=end-of-transmission-block control code
<ETX>=end-of-text transmission control code
CH=check most significant character of the sum, from 0 to 9 and A to F
CH=check least significant character of the sum, from 0 to 9 and A to F
<CR>=ASCII character “carriage return”
<LF>=ASCII character “line feed”
Frame example:
<STX>2P|1|||||||U<CR><ETX>F8<CR><LF>
Checksum
The receiver can check frame transmission error by checksum. It contains residue modulus 256 of the sum of
transmitted character codes from FN to <ETX>. It is an 8-digit number indicated as two hexadecimal codes, with
the most significant bit in the front.
Checksum computation example:
<STX>2P|1|||||||U<CR><ETX>

B-2
 User Manual

Identifiers Character Value (decimal) Sum

<STX> <STX> 2 0
FN ‘2’ 50 50
‘P’ +80 130
‘|’ +124 254
‘1’ +49 303
‘|’ +124 427
‘|’ +124 551
‘|’ +124 675
‘|’ +124 799
‘|’ +124 923
‘|’ +124 1047
‘|’ +124 1171
‘U’ +85 1256
<CR> <CR> +13 1269
<ETX> <ETX> +3 1272
=1272
MOD 256
=248(hex F8)
CH ‘F’ 70
CL ‘8’ 56
<CR> <CR> 13
<LF> <LF> 10

Therefore, the frame will be transmitted in this form:

<STX>2P|1|||||||U<CR><ETX>F8<CR><LF>
1.6.3 Delimiters
The Urinalysis Hybridwill use the following delimiters:
‘|’ - field delimiter
‘\’ - repetition delimiter
‘^’ - component delimiter
‘&’ - escape delimiter (unused)
1.6.4 Communication mode
The Urinalysis Hybridcan apply real-time mode or batch processing mode to communicate with the host.
Real-time mode
The Analyzer scans a barcode of sample and sends the result to LIS if any.
Batch processing mode
The operator manually selects the result from result database and sends it to the database.
2. Message components
(Please refer to ASTM1394 standard, especially FF09 from Section 6 to Section 13.)
This section describes how the Urinalysis Hybridapplies ASTM standard records.

B-3
 User Manual

Description on records of every type is followed by a field table. Only the fields and components applied by the
Urinalysis Hybridare described. If one field or component is not described, it means that it is not applied by the
Urinalysis Hybrid; and the Urinalysis Hybriddoes not transmit zero field and component at the end.
2.1 Application of message header/end record
Logically, they belong to the record set of one patient, including one patient information record, one check order
record, result records and comment records (if any) encapsulated by one message header record and one message
end record.
For example:
<Make a link>
Message header record
Patient information record 1
Check order record 1
Result record 1
Result record 2
Message end record
Message header record
Patient information record 1
Check order record 1
Result record 1
Result record 2
Message end record
<End the link>
2.2 Message from the Urinalysis Hybrid to the host
2.2.1 Message header record to the host
Description
Message header record to the host is the first record in the message.
For example:
Sample: H|\^&|||FUS-3000Plus||||^Sediment^Chemistry^|HOST||P|1|20090323110206<CR>
Single QC: H|\^&|||FUS-3000Plus||||^Sediment^^|HOST| |Q|1|20090323110206<CR>
Multiple QC: H|\^&|||FUS-3000Plus||||^Sediment^^|Host|MultiQC|Q|1|20090323110206<CR>
Chemistry QC: H|\^&|||FUS-3000Plus||||^^Chemistry^|HOST|^neg^1^^Admin^|Q|1|20090323110206<CR>

Field No. E1394 field ASTM field name Field content Maximum length
1 7.1.1 Record type identifier ‘H’ 1
2 7.1.2 Definition of delimiter ‘| \ ^ &’ 4
Emergency treatment
3 7.1.3 ‘E’ 1
mark
5 7.1.5 Sending name 20
‘^Sediment^^’ or ‘ ^^
9 7.1.9 Sending feature Chemistry ^’ or 20
‘ ^Sediment^Chemistry^’
10 7.1.10 Name of the receiver ‘HOST’ 20
11 7.1.11 QC type (As noted below) 10
12 7.1.12 Processing symbol ‘P’ (sample) or ‘Q’(QC) 1
14 7.1.14 Date/time of the message ‘YYYYMMDDHHMMSS’ 14

B-4
 User Manual

Note 1:
7.1.11 Field content:
 Sample: (empty)
 Single QC: “SingleQC”
 Multiple QC: “MultiQC”
 Chemistry QC: “^QC type^QC No.^QC name^Operator^”
2.2.2 Patient information record to the host
Description
Patient information record to the host includes relevant information of the patient.
For example:
P|1|51|barcode||Smith^Tom^J||24^Y|M<CR>
P|1|51|barcode||SmithTomJ||24^Y|M<CR> //data stream

Field No. E1394 field ASTM field name Field content Maximum length
1 8.1.1 Record type identifier ‘P’ 1
2 8.1.2 Serial No. 6
Patient identification No.
3 8.1.3 Sample # 20
designated by the lab
4 8.1.4 Patient ID designated by the lab BARCODE 20
6 8.1.6 Patient name Name 30
8 8.1.8 Age Age^Age unit 10
9 8.1.9 Sex Sex 1

2.2.3 Check order record to the host

Description
Check order record to the host include all sample information results.
For example:
O|1|51|||||20090324153712||||||||Urine|Johnson|||||||||O<CR>
(Note): add the barcode item to 5.09.0000A
For example: O|1|51| barcode||||20090324153712||||||||Urine|Johnson|||||||||O<CR>
Maximum
Field No. E1394 field ASTM field name Field content
length
1 9.4.1 Record type identifier ‘O’ 1
2 9.4.2 Serial No. 6
3 9.4.3 Sample ID Sample # 20
4 9.4.4 Patient ID barcode 20
6 9.4.6 Priority ‘S’ or ‘R’ 1
Date/time of sample
8 9.4.8 ‘YYYYMMDDHHMMSS’ 14
collection
16 9.4.16 Sample descriptor ‘Urine’ 5
The physician giving
17 9.4.17 Physician name 30
advice
26 9.4.26 Types of Report ‘O’,’F’,’I’, ‘C’ or ‘X’ 1

2.2.4 Secretion sediment record to the host

Description

B-5
 User Manual

Result record to the host includes the results of the same sample.
For example:
R|1|RBC|487.94|/uL|0 - 17.00|N||F|Isomorphic
RBC|Admin^|Sediment|20120604163211<CR><ETX>BD<CR><LF>
Maximum
Field No. E1394 field ASTM field name Field content
length
1 10.1.1 Record type identifier ‘R’ 1
2 10.1.2 Serial No. 6
3 10.1.3 Inspection Identification Particle identifier 10
4 10.1.4 Inspection data value 10
5 10.1.5 Unit /ul 10
6 10.1.6 Reference Range Lower limit - upper limit 30
7 10.1.7 Identifier of abnormal result ‘L’, ‘H’, ‘N’ or ‘A’ 1
9 10.1.9 Outcome status ‘F’ or ‘X’ 1
10 10.1.10 Description on RBC alarm ‘Isomorphic RBC’ or blank 10
11 10.1.11 Identifier of the operator Checker^Verifier 60
12 10.1.12 Sending feature “Sediment” 10
Date of time of check
13 10.1.13 ‘YYYYMMDDHHMMSS’ 14
completion

If a particle needs to transmit an image, the image file will closely follow the particle result record. The image file
is in BMP format. If a particle needs to transmit several images, data of these images will be integrated into a data
block. The data block will be converted into a byte stream via Base64 encoding. Every 200 bytes of the byte
stream is a segment and each segment is a record to be transmitted. At the receiver, the received byte stream of
images is recombined and then decoded by Base64 into a data block composed of image files. Thus every image
can be obtained according to BMP format. See picture below:

Example of particle result containing images:

R|1|RBC|32|ul|1-20|N||F|rbc abnormal|Tom^Jamy|sediment|20090329153554<CR>
R|2|RBC|Image data (200 bytes) <CR>
R|3|RBC|Image data (200 bytes) <CR>
…
R|n|RBC|21|Image data (last segment (probably less than 200 bytes)) <CR>

B-6
 User Manual

R|1|WBC|21|ul|1-16|N||F||Tom^Jamy|sediment|20090329153554<CR>
R|2|WBC|Image data (200 bytes) <CR>
R|3|WBC|Image data (200 bytes) <CR>
…
R|m|WBC|Image data (last segment (probably less than 200 bytes)) <CR>
2.2.5 Chemistry result record to the host
Description
Result record to the host includes the results of the same sample.
For example:
R|1|UBG|*^1+^34^umol/L|||N||F||Admin^|Chemistry|20120512153955<CR><ETX>11<CR><LF>

Field No. E1394 field ASTM field name Field content Maximum length
1 10.1.1 Record type identifier ‘R’ 1
2 10.1.2 Serial No. 6
3 10.1.3 Inspection Identification Particle identifier 10
“Abnormal identifier^plus
4 10.1.4 Inspection data value 10
system^value^unit”
7 10.1.7 Identifier of abnormal result ‘L’,’H’,’N’ or ‘A’ 1
9 10.1.9 Outcome status ‘F’ or ‘X’ 1
11 10.1.11 Identifier of the operator Checker^Verifier 60
12 10.1.12 Sending feature “Chemistry” 10
Date of time of check
13 10.1.13 ‘YYYYMMDDHHMMSS’ 14
completion

2.2.6 Request information record to the host

Description
Request information record to the host is used for a request for sample inspection information from the host.
Generally, a query record is generated when the Analyzer scans a sample barcode. Every query record is generated
by sample identifier.
For example:
Q|1|7||ALL||||||||O<CR>

Field No. E1394 field ASTM field name Field content Maximum length
1 12.1.1 Record type identifier ‘Q’ 1
2 12.1.2 Serial No. 6
3 12.1.3 Identification No. of start range Sample # 20
4 12.1.4 BARCODE BARCODE 20
5 12.1.5 Global check No. ‘ALL’ 10
13 12.1.13 Request information status code ‘A’ or ‘O’ 1

2.2.7 Comment record to the host

Description
Comment record includes the comments on the sample specified in the former check order record.
For example:
C|1||Here is the comment<CR>

B-7
 User Manual

Field No. E1394 field ASTM field name Field content Maximum length
1 11.1.1 Record type identifier ‘C’ 1
2 11.1.2 Serial No. 3
4 11.1.4 Criticism Sample comments 200

2.2.8 Message end record to the host

Description
Message header record and message end record encapsulate related patient information together.
For example:
L|1|N<CR>

Field No. E1394 field ASTM field name Field content Maximum length

1 13.1.1 Record type identifier ‘L’ 1

2 13.1.2 Serial No. ‘1’ 1

3 13.1.3 End code ‘N’ 1

2.2.9 QC result record to the host

Description
It is a single QC result record sent to the host.
For example:
R|1|20090318|1035||850-1050|346||Pass||pc|Sediment|2011-05-31 16:05:16<CR>

Field No. E1394 field ASTM field name Field content Maximum length
1 14.1.1 Record type identifier ‘R’ 1
2 14.1.2 Serial No. 6
3 14.1.3 Global check identifier QC batch No. 10
4 14.1.4 Mean Mean 10
6 14.1.6 Reference Range Lower limit - upper limit 30
7 14.1.7 Count Nums Count Nums 10
9 14.1.9 Outcome status “Fail” or “pass” 30
11 14.1.11 QC name QC name 30
12 14.1.12 Sending feature ‘Sediment’ 30
13 14.1.13 Date of time of check ‘YYYY-MM-DDHH:MM:SS’ 26

Description
Multiple QC result record to the host
For example:
R|1|20120531|20|dr|14-50-100||RBC|||qcname|Sediment|2012-05-31 16:47:24<CR>
Maximum
Field No. E1394 field ASTM field name Field content
length
Record type
1 15.1.1 ‘R’ 1
identifier
2 15.1.2 Serial No. 6
Global check
3 15.1.3 QC batch No. 10
identifier

B-8
 User Manual

Maximum
Field No. E1394 field ASTM field name Field content
length
4 15.1.4 Count Nums Count Nums 10
5 15.1.5 QC manufacturer QC manufacturer 30
6 15.1.6 Reference Range Lower limit - target value - upper limit 30
“RBC” or “WBC” or “CAST” or
8 15.1.8 Result type 10
“UNCX”
11 15.1.11 QC name QC name 30
12 15.1.12 Sending feature ‘Sediment’ 10
Date of time of
13 15.1.13 ‘YYYY-MM-DDHH:MM:SS’ 26
check

Description
Chemistry QC result record to the host
For example:
R|5|UBG|^^^Normal 3.4^umol/L^0^|||||||||20120601105638<CR>

Field No. E1394 field ASTM field name Field content Maximum length
1 16.1.1 Record type identifier ‘R’ 1
2 16.1.2 Serial No. 6
3 16.1.3 Project identification Identifier of QC item 10
“^Abnormal identifier^plus
4 16.1.4 Item Results 10
system^value^unit^class^”
13 16.1.13 Date of time of check ‘YYYYMMDDHHMMSS’ 26

2.3 Message from the host to the Urinalysis Hybrid

2.3.1 Message header record from the host
Description
Message header record to the Analyzer is the first record in the message.
For example:
H|\^&<CR>

Field No. E1394 field ASTM field name Field content Maximum length
1 7.1.1 Record type identifier ‘H’ 1
2 7.1.2 Definition of delimiter ‘| \ ^ &’ 4

2.3.2 Patient information record from the host

Description
Patient information record from the host includes relevant information of the patient.
For example:
P|1||200|barcode|SpecimenType|Smith^Tom^J|24^Y|M|i123456|c12_1|Internal medicine|Liu Ying|Urine<CR>

Field No. E1394 field ASTM field name Field content Maximum length
Record type
1 8.1.1 ‘P’ 1
identifier
2 8.1.2 Serial No. 6
3 8.1.3 ER identifier “E” or empty 1
4 8.1.4 Sample # Sample # 20

B-9
 User Manual

Field No. E1394 field ASTM field name Field content Maximum length
5 8.1.5 BARCODE BARCODE 20
6 8.16 Mode test “1” or “0” or “2”(all, sediment, chemistry) 3
7 8.1.6 Patient name 30
8 8.1.8 Age Age^Age unit 10
9 8.1.9 Sex 1
Medical record
10 8.1.10 Medical record No. (i123456) 20
No.
11 8.1.11 Bed No. Bed No. (c12_1) 20
12 8.1.12 Departments Department (internal medicine) 20
Submitting
13 8.1.13 Submitting physician (Liu Ying) 10
physician
“Urine”or “CSF”or “Ascites”(urine,
14 8.1.14 Sample type cerebrospinal fluid, hydrothorax and 10
ascites)

2.3.3 Message end record from the host

Description:
Message header record and message end record encapsulate a message together.
For example:
L|1|N<CR>

Field No. E1394 field ASTM field name Field content Maximum length
1 13.1.1 Record type identifier ‘L’ 1
2 13.1.2 Serial No. ‘1’ 1
3 13.1.3 End code ‘N’ or ‘I’ 1

3. Message example
3.1 Request message from the Urinalysis Hybrid to the host
Urinalysis Hybrid
<ENQ>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>1H|\^&|||FUS-3000Plus|||||HOST||P|1|20120512144914<CR><ETX>D2<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>2Q|1|100||ALL||||||||O<CR><ETX>55<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>3L|1|N<CR><ETX>06<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<EOT>
3.2 Sediment result message from the Urinalysis Hybrid to the host
Urinalysis Hybrid

B-10
 User Manual

<ENQ>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>1H|\^&|||FUS-3000Plus||||^Sediment^^|HOST||P|1|20120604155031<CR><ETX>73<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>2P|1|2|2||Guo Lili||23^years old|Female<CR><ETX>10<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>3O|1|2|||||20120604155031||||||||Urine|Han Jiajia|||||||||O<CR><ETX>A0<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>4C|1|| Eat more fruit <CR><ETX>76<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>5R|1|FAT|0.00|/uL|0 - 1.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120604155031<CR><ETX>4F<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>6R|1|OVFB|0.00|/uL|0 - 1.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120604155031<CR><ETX>A2<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>7R|1|TRCH|0.00|/uL|0 - 1.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120604155031<CR><ETX>A7<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>0R|1|RBCC|0.00|/uL|0 - 1.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120604155031<CR><ETX>89<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>1R|1|BYST|0.00|/uL|0 - 1.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120604155031<CR><ETX>B2<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>2R|1|HYST|0.00|/uL|0 - 1.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120604155031<CR><ETX>B9<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>3R|1|TREP|0.00|/uL|0 - 6.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120604155031<CR><ETX>B2<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>4R|1|REEP|0.00|/uL|0 - 6.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120604155031<CR><ETX>A4<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>

B-11
 User Manual

Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>5R|1|BROAD|0.00|/LPF|0 - 1.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120604155031<CR><ETX>FD<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>6R|1|FATC|0.00|/LPF|0 - 1.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120604155031<CR><ETX>B4<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>7R|1|WAXY|0.00|/LPF|0 - 1.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120604155031<CR><ETX>E0<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>0R|1|EPIC|0.00|/LPF|0 - 1.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120604155031<CR><ETX>B1<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>1R|1|CELL|0.00|/LPF|0 - 1.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120604155031<CR><ETX>B1<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>2R|1|WBCT|0.00|/LPF|0 - 1.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120604155031<CR><ETX>C2<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>3R|1|GRAN|0.00|/LPF|0 - 1.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120604155031<CR><ETX>BB<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>4R|1|RBCT|0.00|/LPF|0 - 1.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120604155031<CR><ETX>BF<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>5R|1|TYRO|0.00|/uL|0 - 1.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120604155031<CR><ETX>C2<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>6R|1|LEUC|0.00|/uL|0 - 1.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120604155031<CR><ETX>9E<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>7R|1|CYST|0.00|/HPF|0 - 1.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120604155031<CR><ETX>D6<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>0R|1|CAPH|0.00|/uL|0 - 10.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120604155031<CR><ETX>BB<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>1R|1|CACB|0.00|/HPF|0 - 10.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120604155031<CR><ETX>C6<CR><LF>
Host

B-12
 User Manual

<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>2R|1|TP04|0.00|/uL|0 - 10.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120604155031<CR><ETX>A9<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>3R|1|URIC|0.00|/HPF|0 - 10.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120604155031<CR><ETX>F2<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>4R|1|AMOR|0.00|/uL|0 - 275.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120604155031<CR><ETX>0F<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>5R|1|CAOX|0.00|/HPF|0 - 3.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120604155031<CR><ETX>BE<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>6R|1|MUCS|0.00|/uL|0 - 28.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120604155031<CR><ETX>E6<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>7R|1|SPRM|0.00|/uL|0 - 6.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120604155031<CR><ETX>BD<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>0R|1|BYST|0.00|/uL|0 - 1.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120604155031<CR><ETX>B1<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>1R|1|UNCX|0.00|/uL|0 - 28.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120604155031<CR><ETX>E7<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>2R|1|BACT|0.00|/uL|0 - 7.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120604155031<CR><ETX>91<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>3R|1|UNCC|0.00|/LPF|0 - 1.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120604155031<CR><ETX>BC<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>4R|1|HYAL|0.00|/LPF|0 - 1.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120604155031<CR><ETX>C2<CR><LF>
Host

B-13
 User Manual

<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>5R|1|NSE|0.00|/uL|0 - 6.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120604155031<CR><ETX>5F<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>6R|1|SQEP|7.92|/uL|0 - 28.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120604155031<CR><ETX>F9<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>7R|1|WBCC|0.00|/uL|0 - 2.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120604155031<CR><ETX>96<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>0R|1|WBC|0.00|/uL|0 - 28.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120604155031<CR><ETX>84<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>1R|1|RBC|7.92|/uL|0 - 17.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120604155031<CR><ETX>90<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>2L|1|N<CR><ETX>05<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<EOT>
3.3 Chemistry result message from the Urinalysis Hybrid to the host
Urinalysis Hybrid
<ENQ>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>1H|\^&|||FUS-3000Plus||||^^Chemistry^|HOST||P|1|20120512153955<CR><ETX>E2<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>2P|1|1|bar456||Wang Yi||40^years old|Male<CR><ETX>FB<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>3O|1|1|||||20120512153955||||||||Urine|Jiu Zhao|||||||||O<CR><ETX>57<CR><LF>

B-14
 User Manual

Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>4C|1|| Further observation<CR><ETX>0F<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>5R|1|UBG|*^1+^34^umol/L|||N||F||Admin^|Chemistry|20120512153955<CR><ETX>11<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>6R|1|BIL|^^Neg^|||N||F||Admin^|Chemistry|20120512153955<CR><ETX>00<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>7R|1|KET|^^Neg^|||N||F||Admin^|Chemistry|20120512153955<CR><ETX>0E<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>0R|1|BLD|*^1+^Ca25^Ery/uL|||N||F||Admin^|Chemistry|20120512153955<CR><ETX>8C<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>1R|1|PRO|*^1+^0.3^g/L|||N||F||Admin^|Chemistry|20120512153955<CR><ETX>F4<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>2R|1|NIT|*^^Pos^|||N||F||Admin^|Chemistry|20120512153955<CR><ETX>52<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>3R|1|LEU|^^Neg^|||N||F||Admin^|Chemistry|20120512153955<CR><ETX>0C<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>4R|1|GLU|*^3+^28^mmol/L|||N||F||Admin^|Chemistry|20120512153955<CR><ETX>17<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>5R|1|SG|^^>=1.030^|||N||F||Admin^|Chemistry|20120512153955<CR><ETX>15<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>

B-15
 User Manual

Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>6R|1|pH|^^<=5.0^|||N||F||Admin^|Chemistry|20120512153955<CR><ETX>D3<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>7R|1|VC|^^>=5.7^mmol/L|||N||F||Admin^|Chemistry|20120512153955<CR><ETX>EE<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>0R|1|MALB|^^Neg^|||N||F||Admin^|Chemistry|20120512153955<CR><ETX>3F<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>1L|1|N<CR><ETX>08<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<EOT>
3.4 Sediment and Chemistry result message from the Urinalysis Hybrid to the host
Urinalysis Hybrid
<ENQ>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>1H|\^&|||FUS-3000Plus||||^Sediment^Chemistry^|HOST||P|1|20120512153955<CR><ETX>E2<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>2P|1|1|bar456||Wang Yi||40^years old|Male<CR><ETX>FB<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>3O|1|1|||||20120512153955||||||||Urine|Zhao Jiu|||||||||O<CR><ETX>57<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>4C|1||Further observed<CR><ETX>0F<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>5R|1|UBG|*^1+^34^umol/L|||N||F||Admin^|Chemistry|20120512153955<CR><ETX>11<CR><LF>
Host

B-16
 User Manual

<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>6R|1|BIL|^^Neg^|||N||F||Admin^|Chemistry|20120512153955<CR><ETX>00<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>7R|1|KET|^^Neg^|||N||F||Admin^|Chemistry|20120512153955<CR><ETX>0E<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>0R|1|BLD|*^1+^Ca25^Ery/uL|||N||F||Admin^|Chemistry|20120512153955<CR><ETX>8C<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>1R|1|PRO|*^1+^0.3^g/L|||N||F||Admin^|Chemistry|20120512153955<CR><ETX>F4<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>2R|1|NIT|*^^Pos^|||N||F||Admin^|Chemistry|20120512153955<CR><ETX>52<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>3R|1|LEU|^^Neg^|||N||F||Admin^|Chemistry|20120512153955<CR><ETX>0C<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>4R|1|GLU|*^3+^28^mmol/L|||N||F||Admin^|Chemistry|20120512153955<CR><ETX>17<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>5R|1|SG|^^>=1.030^|||N||F||Admin^|Chemistry|20120512153955<CR><ETX>15<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>6R|1|pH|^^<=5.0^|||N||F||Admin^|Chemistry|20120512153955<CR><ETX>D3<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>7R|1|VC|^^>=5.7^mmol/L|||N||F||Admin^|Chemistry|20120512153955<CR><ETX>EE<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid

B-17
 User Manual

<STX>0R|1|MALB|^^Neg^|||N||F||Admin^|Chemistry|20120512153955<CR><ETX>3F<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>1R|1|FAT|0.00|/uL|0 - 1.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120512153955<CR><ETX>56<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>2R|1|OVFB|0.00|/uL|0 - 1.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120512153955<CR><ETX>A9<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>3R|1|TRCH|0.00|/uL|0 - 1.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120512153955<CR><ETX>AE<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>4R|1|RBCC|0.00|/uL|0 - 1.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120512153955<CR><ETX>98<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>5R|1|HYST|0.00|/uL|0 - 1.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120512153955<CR><ETX>C7<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>6R|1|TREP|0.00|/uL|0 - 6.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120512153955<CR><ETX>C0<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>7R|1|REEP|0.00|/uL|0 - 6.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120512153955<CR><ETX>B2<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>0R|1|BROAD|0.00|/LPF|0 - 1.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120512153955<CR><ETX>03<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>1R|1|FATC|0.00|/LPF|0 - 1.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120512153955<CR><ETX>BA<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>2R|1|WAXY|0.00|/LPF|0 - 1.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120512153955<CR><ETX>E6<CR><LF>
Host

B-18
 User Manual

<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>3R|1|EPIC|0.00|/LPF|0 - 1.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120512153955<CR><ETX>BF<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>4R|1|CELL|0.00|/LPF|0 - 1.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120512153955<CR><ETX>BF<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>5R|1|WBCT|0.00|/LPF|0 - 1.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120512153955<CR><ETX>D0<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>6R|1|GRAN|0.00|/LPF|0 - 1.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120512153955<CR><ETX>C9<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>7R|1|RBCT|0.00|/LPF|0 - 1.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120512153955<CR><ETX>CD<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>0R|1|TYRO|0.00|/uL|0 - 1.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120512153955<CR><ETX>C8<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>1R|1|LEUC|0.00|/uL|0 - 1.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120512153955<CR><ETX>A4<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>2R|1|CYST|0.00|/HPF|0 - 1.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120512153955<CR><ETX>DC<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>3R|1|CAPH|0.00|/uL|0 - 10.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120512153955<CR><ETX>C9<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>4R|1|CACB|0.00|/HPF|0 - 10.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120512153955<CR><ETX>D4<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid

B-19
 User Manual

<STX>5R|1|TP04|0.00|/uL|0 - 10.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120512153955<CR><ETX>B7<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>6R|1|URIC|0.00|/HPF|0 - 10.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120512153955<CR><ETX>00<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>7R|1|AMOR|0.00|/uL|0 - 275.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120512153955<CR><ETX>1D<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>0R|1|CAOX|0.00|/HPF|0 - 3.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120512153955<CR><ETX>C4<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>1R|1|MUCS|0.00|/uL|0 - 28.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120512153955<CR><ETX>EC<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>2R|1|SPRM|0.00|/uL|0 - 6.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120512153955<CR><ETX>C3<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>3R|1|BYST|0.00|/uL|0 - 1.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120512153955<CR><ETX>BF<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>4R|1|UNCX|0.00|/uL|0 - 28.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120512153955<CR><ETX>F5<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>5R|1|BACT|0.00|/uL|0 - 7.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120512153955<CR><ETX>9F<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>6R|1|UNCC|0.00|/LPF|0 - 1.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120512153955<CR><ETX>CA<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>7R|1|HYAL|0.00|/LPF|0 - 1.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120512153955<CR><ETX>D0<CR><LF>
Host

B-20
 User Manual

<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>0R|1|NSE|0.00|/uL|0 - 6.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120512153955<CR><ETX>65<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>1R|1|SQEP|0.00|/uL|0 - 28.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120512153955<CR><ETX>ED<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>2R|1|WBCC|0.00|/uL|0 - 2.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120512153955<CR><ETX>9C<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>3R|1|WBC|0.00|/uL|0 - 28.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120512153955<CR><ETX>92<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>4R|1|RBC|0.00|/uL|0 - 17.00|N||F||Admin^|Sediment|20120512153955<CR><ETX>8C<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>5L|1|N<CR><ETX>08<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<EOT>
3.5 Single QC result message from the Urinalysis Hybrid to the host
Urinalysis Hybrid
<ENQ>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>1H|\^&|||FUS-3000Plus||||^Sediment^^|HOST|SingleQC
|Q|1|20110705093422<CR><ETX>0B<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>2R|1|1112215|0||0-20|1||Pass||neg|Sediment|2011-07-27 08:51:39<CR><ETX>D8<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid

B-21
 User Manual

<STX>3L|1|N<CR><ETX>06<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<EOT>
3.6 Multiple QC result message from the Urinalysis Hybrid to the host
Urinalysis Hybrid
<ENQ>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>1H|\^&|||FUS-3000Plus||||^Sediment^^|HOST|MultiQC|Q|1|20120601174214<CR><ETX>14<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>2R|1|aesgr|0|asdg|10-50-100|0|RBC|||eg|Sediment|2012-05-11 15:42:06<CR><ETX>DF<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>3R|1|aesgr|0|asdg|10-50-100|0|WBC|||eg|Sediment|2012-05-11 15:42:06<CR><ETX>E5<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>4R|1|aesgr|0|asdg|10-50-100|0|UNCX|||eg|Sediment|2012-05-11 15:42:06<CR><ETX>48<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>5R|1|aesgr|0|asdg|10-50-100|0|CAST|||eg|Sediment|2012-05-11 15:42:06<CR><ETX>36<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>6L|1|N<CR><ETX>09<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<EOT>
3.7 Chemistry QC result message from the Urinalysis Hybrid to the host
Urinalysis Hybrid
<ENQ>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid

B-22
 User Manual

<STX>1H|\^&|||FUS-3000Plus||||^^Chemistry^|HOST|^neg^1^^Admin^|Q|1|20120512150735<CR><ETX>CD<C
R><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>2R|1|Date:|^^^2012-05-26 09:55 27^^-1^|||||||||20120512150735<CR><ETX>83<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>3R|2|No.|^^^1^^-1^|||||||||20120512150735<CR><ETX>07<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>4R|3|ID|^^^^^-1^|||||||||20120512150735<CR><ETX>7A<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>5R|4|RackTubeNO.|^^^1- 1^^-1^|||||||||20120512150735<CR><ETX>7A<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>6R|5|UBG|^^^Normal 3.4^umol/L^0^|||||||||20120512150735<CR><ETX>F7<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>7R|6|BIL|^^^Neg^^0^|||||||||20120512150735<CR><ETX>B6<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>0R|7|KET|^^^Neg^^0^|||||||||20120512150735<CR><ETX>BD<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX> 1R|0|BLD|^^^Neg^^0^|||||||||20120512150735<CR><ETX>A5<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX><CR> 2R|1|PRO|^^^Neg^^0^|||||||||20120512150735<ETX>C6<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX><CR> 3R|2|NIT|^^^Neg^^0^|||||||||20120512150735<ETX>C2<CR><LF>

B-23
 User Manual

Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX><CR> 4R|3|LEU|^^^Neg^^0^|||||||||20120512150735<ETX>BF<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX><CR> 5R|4|GLU|^^^Neg^^0^|||||||||20120512150735<ETX>C3<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX><CR> 6R|5|SG|^^^>=1.030^^5^|||||||||20120512150735<ETX>CF<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX><CR> 7R|6|pH|^^^6.5^^3^|||||||||20120512150735<ETX>19<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX><CR> 0R|7|VC|^^^2.8^mmol/L^3^|||||||||20120512150735<ETX>23<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX><CR> 1R|0|MALB|^^^Neg^^0^|||||||||20120512150735<ETX>EF<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX><CR> 2R|1|SCA|^^^ 0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,5,3,3,0,0,0,0,0^^-1^|||||||||20120512150735<ETX>9F<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<STX>4L|3|N<CR><ETX>06<CR><LF>
Host
<ACK>
Urinalysis Hybrid
<EOT>
4. Test results from the Urinalysis Hybrid to LIS
4.1 Sediment test result
Note: Items without results will not be sent.

Items Description on test items

RBC Red blood cell

B-24
 User Manual

Items Description on test items

NRBC Normal red blood cell
MIRBC Microcyte
ARBC Acanthoid erythrocyte
SRBC Erythrocyte ghost
ORBC Other poikilocytes
WBC White blood cell
WBCC White blood cell cluster
SQEP Squamous epithelial cell
NSE Non-squamous epithelial cell
RTEP Renal tubular epithelial cell
TREP Transitional epithelial cell
Surface transitional epithelial cells(large
STEP
round epithelial cells)
Middle transitional epithelial
CAEP
cells(tail-shaped epithelial cells)
Basal transitional epithelial cells(small
UTEP
round epithelial cells)
BACI Bacillus
SUCO Coccus
XTAC Crystal
CAOX Calcium oxalate crystal
URIC Uric acid crystal
OCRY Other crystals
CACB Calcium carbonate crystal
CAPH Calcium phosphate crystal
CYST Cystine crystal
LEUC Leucine crystal
TYRO Tyrosine crystal
Magnesium ammonium phosphate
MAPH
crystal
BILI Bilirubin crystal
CHOL Cholesterol crystal
DRUG Drug crystal
HYAL Hyaline cast
RBCT RBC cast
GRAN Granular cast
WBCT WBC cast
RTEPT Renal tubular epithelial cell cast
MIXT Mixed cell cast
HEMT Hemoglobin cast
BILT Bilirubin cast
BACTT Bacteria cast

B-25
 User Manual

Items Description on test items

WAXY Waxy cast
FATC Fatty cast
BROAD Broad cast
UNCC Pathological cast
OCAS Other casts
HYST Pseudohypha
BYST Yeast
MUCS Mucous strands
SPRM Sperm
Red blood cell info (empty, uniform red
RBCInfo blood cells, hybrid or non-uniform red
blood cells)
RBCPer Percentage of abnormal red blood cells

4.2 Chemistry test result

Note: Items without results will not be sent.

Items Description on test items

UBG Urobilinogen
BIL bilirubin
KET Ketone body
BLD Blood
PRO Protein
NIT Nitrites
LEU White blood cell
GLU Glucose
SG Specific Gravity
pH pH
VC Ascorbic acid
MALB Microalbumin
TURB Turbidity
COLOR COLOR
CRE Creatinine
Ca Urinary calcium
A:C Microalbumin/creatinine ratio
COND Conductivity

4.3 Single QC test result

Items Description on test items

Total particles Total aldehyde cock red cell particles

4.4 Multiple QC test result

B-26
 User Manual

Items Description on test items

RBC Red blood cell
WBC White blood cell
UNCX Crystal
CAST Cast

4.5 Chemistry QC result

Note: Items without results will not be sent.

Items Description on test items

UBG Urobilinogen
BIL Bilirubin
KET Keytone body
BLD Blood
PRO Protein
NIT Nitrite
LEU Leukocyte
GLU Glucose
SG Specific gravity
pH pH
VC Vitamin C
MALB Microalbumin
TURB Turbidity
COLOR Color
CRE Creatinine
Ca Urinary calcium
Ratio of microalbumin to
A:C
creatinine
COND Conductivity

B-27
User Manual

B-28
 User Manual

Appendix C FUS-3000Plus Urinalysis Hybrid Host Interface Specification

(Network Interface)
This manual is used for message transfer between the Analyzer and LIS (host). It is in accordance with HL7
criterion and of version 2.3.
1. Terms and definitions
Segment (record): a set of fields to describe a complete aspect of a message. Example: one message of doctor’s
advice is transmitted via segment OBR, while one message of observation results is transmitted via segment OBX.
Field: a certain attribute of a segment. Example: patient diagnosis may contain a set of fields.
Duplicate value: some fields may contain many repeating fields. Example: diagnosis field may contain various
diagnoses.
Field components: field parts that can be distinguished, i.e. components. Different components are separated by
component delimiter.
2. Delimiters
Recommended
Delimiters Reason
value
Segment end delimiter <CR> End a record (segment).
It is used to separate two adjacent data fields in the same
Field delimiter | segment or separate the segment identifier and the first data
field in the segment.
It is used to separate adjacent components in adjacent data
Components delimiter ^
fields.
Sub-components It is used to separate adjacent sub-components in data fields.
&
delimiter If there is no sub-component, the delimiter can be omitted.
Repeating Delimiter ~ It is used to separate repeating fields.
It is used for fields of ST, TX or FT type, or components of
ED type data. If one message does not need an escape
Escape character \ character, this character can be omitted.
However, if there are sub-components in the message, an
escape character is necessary.

3. QRY/ORF - query of patient information in LIS

QRY (query observation, from the Analyzer to LIS) QRY (query observation, from the Urinalysis Hybrid to LIS)
is composed of the following segments:
MSH - Message Header
QRD - Query Definition
QRF - Query Filter
ORF (query response, from the Analyzer to LIS) ORF (query response, from the LIS to Urinalysis Hybrid to LIS)
is composed of the following segments:
MSH - Message Header
MSA - Message Acknowledgment
QRD - Query Definition
PID - Patient Definition
PV1 - Patient Visit
OBR - Observation Request
3.1 Details of query segments
3.1.1 MSH - Message Header
MSH segment defines syntactical source and purpose of message as well as some other special matters.

C-1
 User Manual

For example:
MSH|^~\&|FUS-3000Plus||LIS||20120512100352||QRY^R02|MSG0000000|P|2.3<CR>
MSH attribute:

Serial No. Length Data type Options Name

1 4 ST R Coded character
2 180 HD O Instrument type
4 180 HD O Receiving application
6 26 TS O Date/time of message
8 7 CM R Message type
9 20 ST R Message control identifier
10 3 PT R Processing identifier
11 8 ID R Version identifier

MSH-1 Coded characters (ST):

Definition: this field contains the following four characters arranged in the following order: components delimiter,
repetition delimiter, escape character, sub-components delimiter. The recommended values are ^~\&, (ASCII
values 94, 126, 92 and 38).
MSH-2 type (HD):
Definition: this field uniquely identifies the sending program in the network.
MSH-4 receiving application (HD)
Definition: this field uniquely identifies the receiving program in the network.
MSH-6 Date/time of message (TS)
Definition: this field contains the date/time for the system to create the message.
MSH-8 message type (CM)
Components: <Message type (ID)> ^ <Triggered event (ID)>
Definition: this field contains the type and triggered event of the message. The first component is message type,
while the second one is the code of the triggered event. The receiving system uses this field to confirm the
message.
MSH-9 message control identifier (ST)
Definition: this field contains the unique identifier of the message. The receiving system sends this identifier back
to the sending system in Message Acknowledgment (MSA) segment.
MSH-10 processing identifier (PT)
Definition: this field is used to determine whether the HL7 standard is applied to process this message. This field
is always P.
MSH-11 version identifier (ID)
Definition: version 2.3 is adopted there.
3.1.2 QRD - initial type query definition segment
QRD segment is used to define a query.
A CASE:
QRD|20120601144142|R|I|0000004|||20^LI|4^|ORD|ALL<CR>
QRD attribute:

Serial No. Length Data type Options Name

1 26 TS R Query date event

C-2
 User Manual

Serial No. Length Data type Options Name

2 1 ID R Query format code
3 1 ID R Query priority
4 10 ST R Query identifier
7 10 CQ R Query limited request
8 60 XCN R Query subject filter (“sample No.^barcode”)
9 60 CE R Query object filter
10 60 CE R Dept. code

QRD field definition:

QRD-1 query date/time
Definition: this field contains the date/time for the application to create the query.
QRD-2 query format code
Definition: this field is the character “R”.
QRD-3 query priority
Definition: this field contains the expected time box of response. Here it is “I” (instant).
QRD-4 query identifier
Definition: this field contains the unique identifier of the query. It is designated by the query and sent back by the
response system completely.
QRD-7 query limited request
Definition: this field contains the maximum length of the request that can be received by the request system. This
field is always “20^LI”.
QRD-8 query subject filter
Definition: this field contains the queried subject (sample No. or barcode).
QRD-9 query object filter
Definition: this field contains the queried content, which is always “ORD”. (This field in response segment is
always “DEM”)
QRD-10 What department data code
Definition: this field may contain test No., process No., drug No., item No. and No. of doctor’s advice. It is always
“ALL” here.
3.1.3 QRF - initial type query filter segment
QRF segment is used together with QRD segment to further refine a query.
A CASE:
QRF|FUS-3000Plus||200904231445<CR>
QRF attribute

Serial No. Length Data type Options Name

1 20 ST R Position of subject filter
3 26 TS O End date/time of data

Definition of QRF field:

Position of QRF-1 subject filter
Definition: this field contains query of the dept., system or subsystem. It is always“FUS-3000Plus”.
QRF-3 data end date and time

C-3
 User Manual

Definition: this field contains the date/time.

3.2 Details of response segments
3.2.1 MSH - Message Header
See MSH segment of query for transmission from LIS to the Urinalysis Hybrid.
A CASE:
MSH|^~\&|LIS||FUS-3000Plus||20120601144142||ORF|RSP0000000|P|2.3<CR>
3.2.2 MSA - Message Acknowledgment
MSA segment contains the information when another message is acknowledged.
A CASE:
MSA|AA|MSG0000001<CR>
MSA attribute:

Serial No. Length Data type Options Name

1 2 ID R Acknowledgment code
2 20 ST R Message control identification No.

Definition of MSA field:

MSA-1 acknowledgment code
Definition: this field contains the acknowledgment code. It may be any one of the following values:
AA - Application acceptance
AE - Application error
MSA-2 message control identification No.
Definition: this field contains the control identification No. of the message from sending system. It enable the
sending system to link the response with the message.
3.2.3 QRD - query definition
(The same as the QRD of query)
A CASE:
QRD|20120512101830|R|I|0000000|||20^LI|4^|DEM|ALL<CR>
3.2.4 PID - Patient Identification
As the main means to transmit patient identification, PID segment is used by all applications. This segment
contains the patient’s personal information that will not change frequently in general.
A CASE:
PID|||4^3412|Urine|mode||^|<CR>
PID attribute:

Serial No. Length Data type Options Name

3 20 CX R Sample No.^barcode
4 20 CX O Sample type
5 1 IS O Test mode
7 26 TS O Age^Age unit
8 2 IS O Sex

Definition of PID field:

PID-3 patient identification No.
Definition: this field contains the unique identification No. of the patient. It refers to sample No. and barcode here.

C-4
 User Manual

PID-4 barcode
Definition: this field contains the sample type.
PID-5 test mode
Definition: this field contains the test mode. “1” or “0” or “2”(all, sediment, chemistry)
PID-7 age
Definition: this field contains age in the format of “Age^Age unit”.
PID-8 gender (IS):
Definition: this field contains the gender of the patient.
3.2.5 PV1 - Patient Visit
Registration/patient management program is used in PV1 segment to transmit the information of patient visit.
A CASE:
PV1||I|^<CR>
PV1 attribute:

Serial No. Length Data type Options Name

2 1 IS R Patient category
3 80 PL O Specified address of patient

Definition of PV1 field:

PV1-2 patient category definition:
Definition: this field classifies patients according to locations. It may be any one of the following values:
E - emergency patients
I - inpatients
O - outpatients
PV1-3 specified address of patient:
Definition: this field contains the location of the patient.
3.2.6 OBR - Observation Request
OBR segment is used as the header of report on clinical data. It identifies the subsequent atom observation set. It
contains relevant doctor’s advice.
A CASE:
OBR||||FUS-3000Plus|||20120531183444||||||||Urine|<CR>
OBR attribute:

Serial No. Length Data type Options Name

4 200 CE R Sending program
7 26 TS C Sending time
15 300 CM O Sample type

Definition of OBR field:

OBR-4 sending program:
Definition: this field contains the sending program.
OBR-7 sending time:
Definition: this field contains the sending time.
OBR-15 sample type:
Definition: this field contains the sample type that is “Urine” here.

C-5
 User Manual

4. ORU/ACK - Unsolicited transmission of observation message

The Urinalysis Hybrid sends the test result to LIS in form of ORU/ACK message. Every result of the Urinalysis
Hybrid is transmitted in form of two result segments (OBX).
ORU (unsolicited observation report, from the Analyzer to LIS) QRY (query observation, from the Urinalysis
Hybrid to LIS) is composed of the following segments:
MSH - Message Header
PID - Patient Identification
OBR - Observation Report Identification
OBX - Observation Result(s) (one or more)
NTE - Notes or comments
ACK (Acknowledgement) is composed of the following segments:
MSH - Message Header
MSA - Message Acknowledgment
4.1 Details of ORU segment
4.1.1 MSH - Message Header
MSH segment defines syntactical source and purpose of message as well as some other special matters.
A CASE:
MSH|^~\&|FUS-3000Plus|^Sediment^Chemistry^|LIS|E|20090424130516||QRU^R02|MSA0000001|P|2.3<CR>
MSH attribute:

Serial No. Length Data type Options Name

1 4 ST R Coded characters
2 180 HD O Instrument Type
3 180 HD O Types of Inspection
4 180 HD O Receiving application
5 1 ST R Emergency treatment mark
6 26 TS O Date/time of the message
8 7 CM R Type of the Message
9 20 ST R Message control identifier
10 3 PT R Processing identification
11 8 ID R Version identification

MSH-1 Coded characters (ST):

Definition: this field contains the following four characters arranged in the following order: components delimiter,
repetition delimiter, escape character, sub-components delimiter. The recommended values are ^~\&, (ASCII
values 94, 126, 92 and 38).
MSH-2 type (HD):
Definition: this field uniquely identifies the sending program in the network.
MSH-3 test type:
Definition: this field identifies the test type, “Sediment” or “Chemistry” or blank.
MSH-4 receiving application (HD)
Definition: this field uniquely identifies the receiving program in the network.
MSH-5 emergency identifier (ST)
Definition: this field uses the identifier “E” for emergency sample.

C-6
 User Manual

MSH-6 Date/time of message (TS)

Definition: this field contains the date/time for the system to create the message.
MSH-8 message type (CM)
Components: <Message type (ID)> ^ <Triggered event (ID)>
Definition: this field contains the type and triggered event of the message. The first component is message type,
while the second one is the code of the triggered event. The receiving system uses this field to confirm the
message.
MSH-9 message control identifier (ST)
Definition: this field contains the unique identifier of the message. The receiving system sends this identifier back
to the sending system in Message Acknowledgment (MSA) segment.
MSH-10 processing identifier (PT)
Definition: this field is used to determine whether the HL7 standard is applied to process this message. This field
is always P.
MSH-11 version identifier (ID)
Definition: version 2.3 is adopted there.
4.1.2 PID - Patient Identification
As the main means to transmit patient identification, PID segment is used by all applications. This segment
contains the patient’s personal information that will not change frequently in general.
A CASE:
PID|||25|barcode|Li Mingbo||23^Y|F<CR>
PID attribute:

Serial No. Length Data type Options Name

3 20 CX R Sample #
4 20 CX O BARCODE
5 48 XPN R PATIENT NAME
7 26 TS O Age
8 1 IS O Sex

Definition of PID field:

PID-3 patient identification No.
Definition: this field contains the unique identification No. of the patient. It is a sample No. here.
PID-4 barcode
Definition: this field contains the sample barcode.
PID-5 patient name
Definition: this field contains the name of the patient.
PID-7 age
Definition: this field contains the birth date of the patient. Format: Age^Age unit.
PID-8 gender (IS):
Definition: this field contains the gender of the patient.
4.1.3 OBR - Observation Request
OBR segment is used as the header of report on clinical data. It identifies the subsequent atom observation set. It
contains relevant doctor’s advice.
A CASE:

C-7
 User Manual

OBR||||FUS-3000Plus|||200904211523||||||||urine|zhangmei<CR>
OBR attribute:

Serial No. Length Data type Options Name

4 200 CE R Universal service identification No.
7 26 TS C Observation date/time
9 20 CQ O Collected volume
13 300 ST O Relevant clinical information
15 300 CM O Sample source (type)
The provider of doctor’s advice
16 80 XCN O
(The doctor giving advice)

Definition of OBR field:

OBR-4 universal service identification No.:
Definition: this field is the observation identification code of request.
OBR-7 observation date/time
Definition: this field is relevant date/time of observation.
OBR-9 collected volume:
Definition: for clinical trials, the collected volume is sample volume.
OBR-13 relevant clinical information:
Definition: this field contains additional information of the patient of sample.
OBR-15 sample source:
Definition: it is “Urine”, “Ascites” or “CSF” here.
OBR-16 the provider of doctor’s advice:
Definition: the doctor giving advice.
4.1.4 OBX - Observation/Result
OBX segment is used to transmit a single observation result or fragment. It represents the minimum inseparable
unit of a report. It is mainly used to carry information in the report message.
Sediment result:
A CASE:
OBX|91|NM|WBCC|1|0.00|/uL|0 - 2.00||||F||Sediment|20120531191555||Admin<CR>
OBX|92|ED|WBCC|1|image data (BMP type) <CR>
Note: The image is in BMP format, expressed in ASCII byte sequence, and encoded in MIME base64 format. ED
represents image data transmitted, and image data in the "image data" segment is composed of BMP data header
and BMP data body. If there are multiple images, they are the data headers and data bodies of multiple BMPs.
The size of a single image can be obtained from the data header of the BMP.
OBX attribute:

Serial No. Length Data type Options Name

1 10 SI O Sequence number
2 2 ID C Value types
3 20 CE R Particle name
4 20 ST C Observation sub-identifier
5 10 ST C Observed value

C-8
 User Manual

Serial No. Length Data type Options Name

6 60 CE O Unit
7 10 ST O Reference range (lower limit - upper limit)
11 1 ID R Status of observation result
13 10 ST O Types of Inspection
14 26 TS O Observation date/time
16 80 XCN O Responsible observer

Definition of OBX field:

OBX-1 sequence No.:
Definition: this field contains the order.
OBX-2 value type:
Definition: this field contains the format of observation values in OBX.
OBX-3 particle name:
Definition: this field contains the unique identifier of every observation result such as RBC, WBC and WBCC.
OBX-4 observation sub-identifier:
Definition: this field is to distinguish different OBX segments under the same OBR.
OBX-5 observation values:
Definition: this field contains the observation values. OBX-2 value type contains data type in this field.
OBX-6 units:
Definition: this field contains the units of data.
OBX-7 reference range:
Components: for numeric values, the format is as follows:
Lower limit - upper limit (if there are both lower limit and upper limit like “3.5 - 4.5”)
OBX-11 status of observation result
Definition: this field contains the status of observation result, which is always “F”.
OBX-13 check type
Definition: it is “Sediment” here.
OBX-14 observation date/time
Definition: this field contains the date/time of observation.
OBX-16 responsible observer
Definition: this field contains the identifier of the person directly responsible for observation results (i.e. the
checker).
Chemistry result:
A CASE:
OBX|1|NM|lot123|qcname|8||12-20|Failure|142||F||Sediment|2012-05-31 20:18:03<CR>
OBX attribute:

Serial No. Length Data type Options Name

1 10 FT O Sequence number
2 2 ID C Value types
3 20 FT O Observation identification

C-9
 User Manual

Serial No. Length Data type Options Name

4 50 CE O QC name
5 10 ST O QC mean
7 50 ST O Reference range
8 10 CE O Abnormality mark
9 20 ST O Count value
11 2 ID C Status of observation result
Single QC or multiple QC
12 20 ST R
identification
13 20 ST O QC type
14 26 TS O QC date and time

Definition of OBX field:

OBX-1 sequence No.:
Definition: this field contains the order.
OBX-2 value type:
The field is set to “NM”.
OBX-3 observation identification:
This field contains the QC lot number.
OBX-4 QC name:
This field contains the control name.
OBX-5 observation value:
This field contains the control mean.
OBX-7 reference range:
Field format: lower limit －higher limit.
OBX-8 abnormality mark:
This field contains the QC result status value (“passed” or “failed”).
OBX-9 count value:
This field contains the count value of QC results.
OBX-11 observation result status:
The field is set to “F”.
OBX-12 single QC or multiple QC identification
The field identifies a QC type. Here is “SingleQC” or blank (when the field is empty, the default is single QC).
OBX-13 QC type
The field identifies a QC type. Here is “Sediment”.
OBX-14 QC date and time:
This field contains the QC date and time.
Multiple QC result:
A CASE:
OBX|1|NM|lot|Multiple|3|Manufacturer|10-50-100|||RBC|F|MultiQC|Sediment|2012-05-12 13:28:05<CR>
OBX|3|NM|lot|Multiple|5|Manufacturer|10-50-100|||WBC|F|MultiQC|Sediment|2012-05-12 13:28:05<CR>
OBX|5|NM|lot|Multiple|4|Manufacturer|10-50-100|||UNCX|F|MultiQC|Sediment|2012-05-12 13:28:05<CR>

C-10
 User Manual

OBX|7|NM|lot|Multiple|6|Manufacturer|10-50-100|||CAST|F|MultiQC|Sediment|2012-05-12 13:28:05<CR>
OBX attribute:
Serial No. Length Data type Options Name
1 10 FT O Sequence number
2 2 ID C Value type
3 20 FT O QC lot number
4 50 ST O QC name
5 20 ST O QC count value
6 50 ST O Manufacturer
Reference range<lower
7 50 ST O
limit-mean-higher limit>
10 50 ST O Particle name
11 2 ID C Observation result status
Single QC or multiple QC
12 20 ST O
identification
13 20 ST O QC type
14 26 TS O Observation date and time

OBX field definition:

OBX-1 Sequence number
This field contains the order.
OBX-2 Value type
This field is set to “NM”.
OBX-3 observation identification:
This field contains QC lot number.
OBX-4 QC name:
This field contains the control name.
OBX-5 QC count value:
This field contains the count value of QC results.
OBX-6Manufacturer
This field contains the manufacturer of the control.
OBX-7 Reference range:
Format: lower limit-mean-higher limit.
OBX-10 Particle name:
This field contains the QC result status value.
OBX-11 Observation result status:
This field is set to“F”.
OBX-12 Single QC or multiple QC identification
The field identifies a QC type. Here is “MultiQC”.
OBX-13QC type
This field contains the QC type. Here is “Sediment”.
OBX-14 Observation date and time:
This field contains the observation date and time.

C-11
 User Manual

Chemistry result:
A CASE:
OBX|15|NM|GLU|1|*^3+^500^mg/dL|||L|||F||Chemistry|Admin<CR>
OBX|16|ED|GLU|1|<CR>
OBX attribute:

Serial No. Length Data type Options Name

1 10 SI O Sequence number
2 2 ID C Value type
3 20 CE R Name of component
4 20 ST C Observation sub-identifier
Observation value “Abnormality
5 50 ST C
identifier^plus system^value^unit”
11 1 ID R Observation result status
13 10 ST O Check type
14 20 XCN O Responsible observer

Definition of OBX field:

OBX-1 sequence No.:
Definition: this field contains the order.
OBX-2 value type:
Definition: this field contains the format of observation values in OBX.
OBX-3 component name:
Definition: this field contains the unique identifier of every observation result
OBX-4 observation sub-identifier:
Definition: this field is to distinguish different OBX segments under the same OBR.
OBX-5 observation values:
Definition: this field contains the observation results in the format of “Abnormal identifier^plus
system^value^unit”.
OBX-11 status of observation result
Definition: this field contains the status of observation result, which is always “F”.
OBX-13 check type
Value: “Chemistry”
OBX-14 responsible observer
Definition: this field contains the identifier of the person directly responsible for observation results (i.e. the
checker).
4.1.5 NTE - Notes or comments
It is a common format in which the notes or comments are sent.
A CASE:
NTE|||comments<CR>
NTE attribute:

Serial No. Length Data type Options Name

3 64k FT O Comment

C-12
 User Manual

Definition of NTE field:

NTE-3 comments
Definition: this field contains the comments.
4.2 Details of ACK segments
4.2.1 MSH - see the aforesaid response segment
A CASE:
MSH|^~\&|LIS||FUS-3000Plus||20120601152401||ACK|ACK0000004|P|2.3<CR>
4.2.2 MSA - see the aforesaid response segment
A CASE:
MSA|AA|RES0000007<CR>
5. QC result message:
FUS-3000Plus Urinalysis Hybrid uses the ORU/ACK message to a QC result to the LIS system.
ORU consists of the following segments:
● MSH – header
● OBR – observation report ID
● OBX - observation/result
ACK consists of the following segments:
● MSH – header
● MSA – message confirmation
5.1 Single QC OBX attribute
The OBX segment is used to transfer QC result data.
A CASE:
MSH|^~\&|FUS-3000Plus|^Sediment^^|LIS||20120531202416|| ORU^R01|QC0000013|P|2.3<CR>
OBR||||FUS-3000Plus|||20120531202416<CR>
OBX|1|NM|lot123|qcname|8||12-20|Failure|142||F||Sediment|2012-05-31 20:18:03<CR>
OBX attribute:

Serial No. Length Data type Options Name

1 10 FT O Sequence number
2 2 ID C Value type
3 20 FT O Observation identification
4 50 CE O QC name
5 10 ST O QC mean
7 50 ST O Reference range
8 10 CE O Abnormality mark
9 20 ST O Count value
11 2 ID C Observation result status
12 20 ST R
13 20 ST O QC type
14 26 TS O QC date and time

OBX field definition:

C-13
 User Manual

OBX-1 Sequence number

This field contains the order.
OBX-2 Value type
This field is set to “NM”.
OBX-3 observation identification:
This field contains QC lot number.
OBX-4 QC name:
This field contains the control liquid name.
OBX-5 observation value:
This field contains the control liquid mean.
OBX-7 Reference range:
Field format: lower limit－higher limit.
OBX-8 abnormality mark:
This field contains the QC result status value (“passed” or “failed”).
OBX-9 count value:
This field contains the QC result count value.
OBX-11 Observation result status:
This field is set to “F”.
OBX-13QC type
This field identifies a QC type. Here is “Sediment”.
OBX-14 QC date and time:
This field contains the QC date and time.
5.2 Multiple QC OBX attribute
Multiple QC result:
A CASE:
OBX|1|NM|lot|Multiple|3|Manufacturer|10-50-100|||RBC|F|MultiQC|Sediment|2012-05-12 13:28:05<CR>
OBX|3|NM|lot|Multiple|5|Manufacturer|10-50-100|||WBC|F|MultiQC|Sediment|2012-05-12 13:28:05<CR>
OBX|5|NM|lot|Multiple|4|Manufacturer|10-50-100|||UNCX|F|MultiQC|Sediment|2012-05-12 13:28:05<CR>
OBX|7|NM|lot|Multiple|6|Manufacturer|10-50-100|||CAST|F|MultiQC|Sediment|2012-05-12 13:28:05<CR>
OBX attribute:

Serial No. Length Data type Options Name

1 10
2 2
3 20
4 50
5 20
6 50
7 50
10 50
11 2 ID
FT O Sequence number
ID C Value type
FT O QC lot number
ST O QC name
ST O QC count value
ST O Manufacturer
Reference range<lower
ST O
limit-mean-higher limit>
ST O Particle name
C Observation result status

C-14
 User Manual

Serial No. Length Data type Options Name

Single QC or multiple QC
12 20 ST O
identification
13 20 ST O QC type
14 26 TS O Observation date and time

OBX field definition:

OBX-1 Sequence number
This field contains the order.
OBX-2 Value type
This field is set to “NM”.
OBX-3 observation identification:
This field contains QC lot number.
OBX-4 QC name:
This field contains the control name.
OBX-5 QC count value:
This field contains the count value of QC results.
OBX-6Manufacturer
This field contains the manufacturer of the control.
OBX-7 Reference range:
Format:lower limit-mean-higher limit.
OBX-10 Particle name:
This field contains the QC result status value.
OBX-11 Observation result status:
This field is set to“F”.
OBX-12 Single QC or multiple QC identification
The field identifies a QC type. Here is “MultiQC”.
OBX-13QC type
This field contains the QC type. Here is “Sediment”.
OBX-14 Observation date and time:
This field contains the observation date and time.
5.3 Chemistry QC OBX attribute
The OBX segment is used to transfer chemistry QC result data.
A CASE:
MSH|^~\&|FUS-3000Plus|^^Chemistry^|LIS|neg|20120512133223|| ORU^R01|QC0000001|P|2.3<CR>
PID|||1||||M<CR>
OBX|1|NM|UBG||^^^Normal 3.4^umol/L^0^||||||||Chemistry|20120512133223|||<CR>
OBX|2|NM|BIL||^^^Neg^^0^||||||||Chemistry|20120512133223|||<CR>
OBX|3|NM|KET||^^^Neg^^0^||||||||Chemistry|20120512133223|||<CR>
OBX|4|NM|BLD||^^^Neg^^0^||||||||Chemistry|20120512133223|||<CR>
OBX|5|NM|PRO||^^^Neg^^0^||||||||Chemistry|20120512133223|||<CR>
OBX|6|NM|NIT||^^^Neg^^0^||||||||Chemistry|20120512133223|||<CR>
OBX|7|NM|LEU||^^^Neg^^0^||||||||Chemistry|20120512133223|||<CR>

C-15
 User Manual

OBX|0|NM|GLU||^^^Neg^^0^||||||||Chemistry|20120512133223|||<CR>
OBX|1|NM|SG||^^^>=1.030^^5^||||||||Chemistry|20120512133223|||<CR>
OBX|2|NM|pH||^^^6.5^^3^||||||||Chemistry|20120512133223|||<CR>
OBX|3|NM|VC||^^^2.8^mmol/L^3^||||||||Chemistry|20120512133223|||<CR>
OBX|4|NM|MALB||^^^Neg^^0^||||||||Chemistry|20120512133223|||<CR>
OBX|5|NM|SCA||^^^ 0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,5,3,3,0,0,0,0,0^^-1^||||||||Chemistry|20120512133223|||<CR>
OBX attribute:

Serial No. Length Data type Options Name

1 10 ST O Sequence number
2 2 ID C Value type
3 50 ST O Item identification
Item result(^abnormality mark^plus
5 50 ST O
system^value^unit^level^)
13 20 ST O QC type
14 26 TS O Observation date and time

OBX field definition:

OBX-1 sequence number
This field contains the order.
OBX-2 value type
This field is set to “NM”.
OBX-3 item identification:
This field contains the item identification.
OBX-5 item result:
This field contains the item result, in the format of: “^abnormality mark^plus system^value^unit^level^”
OBX-13QC type
This field contains a QC type. Here is “Chemistry”.
OBX-14 Observation date and time:
This field contains the observation date and time.
6. MLLP(Minimal Lower Layer Protocol)
The Urinalysis Hybrid applies MLLP for communication with LIS.
Block format
HL7 content block
HL7 content is encapsulated by special characters to form a block. The format of the block is as follows:
<SB>dddd<EB><CR>
●<SB>: start block character (1 byte). ASCII character <VT>, i.e., 0x0B.
●data (composed of different length of bytes). It is HL7 data of the block. The data can contain any single-byte
value greater than the hexadecimal value 0x1F, as well as the carriage return of ASCII code, <CR>.
● <EB>: end-of-block character (1 byte). ASCII character <FS>, i.e., 0x1C.
● <CR>: carriage return (1 byte). ASCII character <CR>, i.e., 0x0D.
Acknowledgement block
The format of acknowledgement block is as follows:
<SB><ACK><EB><CR>

C-16
 User Manual

A CASE:
<SB>
MSH|^~\&|FUS-3000Plus|^Sediment^^|LIS||20090424130516||QRY^A19|MSG0000001|P|2.3<CR>
QRD|20090424130516|R|I|0000001|||20^LI|1234567|DEM|ALL<CR>
<EB><CR>
7. Message example:
7.1 Request patient info
Query from the Urinalysis Hybrid to LIS:
MSH|^~\&|FUS-3000Plus|^Sediment^^|LIS||20091224130517||QRY^R02|MSG0000000|P|2.3<CR>
QRD|20091224130517|R|I|0000000|||20^LI|F 000071|ORD|ALL<CR>
QRF|FUS-3000Plus||20091224130517<CR>
Acknowledgement response from LIS to the Urinalysis Hybrid:
MSH|^~\&|LIS|Sediment|FUS-3000Plus||20091224132036||ORF|RSP0000000|P|2.3<CR>
MSA|AA|MSG0000000<CR>
QRD|20091224131647|R|I|0000000|||20^LI|F 000071| DEM |ALL<CR>
PID|||PID1234567||Evans Carolyn||23^Y|M<CR>
PV1||I|8<CR>
OBR||||FUS-3000Plus|||20091224132036||||||||urine|zhangmei<CR>
MSH|^~\&|LIS||FUS-3000Plus||20120904183629||ORF|RSP0000000|P|2.3
MSA|AA|MSG0000003
QRD|20120904183629|R|I|0000003|||20^LI|^200|DEM|ALL
PID|||^||||^|
PV1||I|^
OBR||||FUS-3000Plus|||20120904183629|||||||||
7.2 Transfer test result
Test result sent from Urinalysis Hybrid to LIS:
MSH|^~\&|FUS-3000Plus|^Sediment^Chemistry^|LIS||20120601160226||ORU^R01|RES0000010|P|2.3<CR>
PID|||1005|123456789|Zhang San||25^years old|Male<CR>
OBR||||FUS-3000Plus|||20120601160226||||||||Urine|<CR>
OBX|1|NM|UBG|1|^^error^|||L|||F||Chemistry|Admin<CR>
OBX|2|ED|UBG|1|<CR>
OBX|3|NM|BIL|1|^^error^|||L|||F||Chemistry|Admin<CR>
OBX|4|ED|BIL|1|<CR>
……
OBX|29|NM|FAT|1|0.00|/uL|0 - 1.00|L|||F||Sediment|20120601160226||Admin<CR>
OBX|30|ED|FAT|1|<CR>
OBX|31|NM|OVFB|1|0.00|/uL|0 - 1.00|L|||F||Sediment|20120601160226||Admin<CR>
OBX|32|ED|OVFB|1|<CR>
……
NTE|||Comment<CR>
Acknowledgement response from LIS to the Urinalysis Hybrid:(Acknowledgment):
MSH|^~\&|LIS||FUS-3000Plus||20120601160226||ACK|ACK0000005|P|2.3<CR>

C-17
 User Manual

MSA|AA|RES0000010<CR>
7.3 Transfer single QC result
QC result data from the Urinalysis Hybrid to LIS:
MSH|^~\&|FUS-3000Plus|^Sediment^^|LIS||20120601155123|| ORU^R01|QC0000000|P|2.3<CR>
OBR||||FUS-3000Plus|||20120601155123<CR>
OBX|1|NM|123|Name|10||9-12|Passed|11||F||Sediment|2012-05-30 15:50:49<CR>
Acknowledgement response from LIS to the Urinalysis Hybrid(Acknowledgment):
MSH|^~\&|LIS|^Sediment^^|FUS-3000Plus||20120601155123||ACK|ACK0000002|P|2.3<CR>
MSA|AA|QC0000000<CR>
7.4 Transfer multiple QC result
Multiple QC result data from the Urinalysis Hybrid to LIS:
MSH|^~\&|FUS-3000Plus|^Sediment^^|LIS||20120601161014|| ORU^R01|QC0000000|P|2.3<CR>
OBR||||FUS-3000Plus|||20120601161014<CR>
OBX|1|NM|123|Name|34|Manufacturer|10-50-100||34|RBC|F|MultiQC|Sediment|2012-05-23 16:09:50<CR>
OBX|3|NM|123|Name|67|Manufacturer|10-50-100||67|WBC|F|MultiQC|Sediment|2012-05-23 16:09:50<CR>
OBX|5|NM|123|Name|23|Manufacturer|10-50-100||23|UNCX|F|MultiQC|Sediment|2012-05-23 16:09:50<CR>
OBX|7|NM|123|Name|75|Manufacturer|10-50-100||75|CAST|F|MultiQC|Sediment|2012-05-23 16:09:50<CR>
Acknowledgement response from LIS to the Urinalysis Hybrid(Acknowledgment):
MSH|^~\&|LIS|^Sediment^^|FUS-3000Plus||20120601161014||ACK|ACK0000007|P|2.3<CR>
MSA|AA|QC0000000<CR>
7.5 Transfer chemistry QC result
Chemistry QC result data from Urinalysis Hybrid to LIS:
MSH|^~\&|FUS-3000Plus|^^Chemistry^|LIS|neg|20120601161654|| ORU^R01|QC0000001|P|2.3<CR>
PID|||1||||M<CR>
OBX|1|NM|Date:||^^^2012-05-26 09:55 27^^-1^||||||||Chemistry|20120601161654|||<CR>
OBX|2|NM|No.||^^^1^^-1^||||||||Chemistry|20120601161654|||<CR>
OBX|3|NM|ID||^^^^^-1^||||||||Chemistry|20120601161654|||<CR>
OBX|4|NM|RackTubeNO.||^^^1- 1^^-1^||||||||Chemistry|20120601161654|||<CR>
OBX|5|NM|UBG||^^^Normal 3.4^umol/L^0^||||||||Chemistry|20120601161654|||<CR>
OBX|6|NM|BIL||^^^Neg^^0^||||||||Chemistry|20120601161654|||<CR>
……
Acknowledgement response from LIS to the Urinalysis Hybrid(Acknowledgment):
MSH|^~\&|LIS|^^Chemistry^|FUS-3000Plus|neg|20120601161654||ACK|ACK0000008|P|2.3<CR>
MSA|AA|QC0000001<CR>
8. Test result items from Urinalysis Hybrid to LIS
8.1 Sediment test result items
Note: Items without results will not be sent.

Items Description on test items

RBC Red blood cells
NRBC Normal red blood cells
MIRBC Microcyte

C-18
 User Manual

Items Description on test items

ARBC Acanthoid erythrocyte
SRBC Erythrocyte ghost
ORBC Other poikilocytes
WBC White blood cells
WBCC White blood cell cluster
SQEP Squamous epithelial cell
NSE Non-squamous epithelial cell
RTEP Renal tubular epithelial cell
TREP Transitional epithelial cell
Surface transitional epithelial
STEP
cells(large round epithelial cells)
Middle transitional epithelial
CAEP
cells(tail-shaped epithelial cells)
Basal transitional epithelial
UTEP
cells(small round epithelial cells)
BACI Bacillus
SUCO Coccus
XTAC Crystal
CAOX Calcium oxalate crystal
URIC Uric acid crystal
OCRY Other crystals
CACB Calcium carbonate crystal
CAPH Calcium phosphate crystal
CYST Cystine crystal
LEUC Leucine crystal
TYRO Tyrosine crystal
Magnesium ammonium phosphate
MAPH
crystal
BILI Bilirubin crystal
CHOL Cholesterol crystal
DRUG Drug crystal
HYAL Hyaline cast
RBCT RBC cast
GRAN Granular cast
WBCT WBC cast
RTEPT Renal tubular epithelial cell cast
MIXT Mixed cell cast
HEMT Hemoglobin cast
BILT Bilirubin cast
BACTT Bacteria cast
WAXY Waxy cast
FATC Fatty cast

C-19
 User Manual

Items Description on test items

BROAD Broad cast
UNCC Pathological cast
OCAS Other casts
HYST Pseudohypha
BYST Yeast
MUCS Mucous strands
SPRM Sperm
Red blood cell info (empty, uniform
RBCInfo red blood cells, hybrid or non-uniform
red blood cells)
Percentage of abnormal red blood
RBCPer
cells

8.2 Chemistry test result items

Note: Items without results will not be sent.

Items Description on test items

UBG Urobilinogen

BIL Bilirubin

KET Keytone body

BLD Blood

PRO Protein

NIT Nitrite

LEU Leukocyte

GLU Glucose

SG Specific gravity

pH pH

VC Vitamin C

MALB Microalbumin

TURB Turbidity

COLOR Color

CRE Creatinine

Ca Urinary calcium
Ratio of microalbumin to
A:C
creatinine
COND Conductivity

8.3 Single QC test result items

Items Description on test items

Total aldehyde cock red cell
Total particles
particles

8.4 Multiple QC test result items

C-20
 User Manual

Note: Items without results will not be sent.

Items Description on test items

RBC Red blood cells
WBC White blood cells
UNCX Crystal
CAST Cast

8.5 Chemistry QC result items

Note: Items without results will not be sent.

Items Description on test items

UBG Urobilinogen
BIL Bilirubin
KET Keytone body
BLD Blood
PRO Protein
NIT Nitrite
LEU Leucocyte
GLU Glucose
SG Specific gravity
pH pH
VC Vitamin C
MALB Microalbumin
TURB Turbidity
COLOR Color
CRE Creatinine
Ca Urinary calcium
Ratio of microalbumin to
A:C
creatinine
COND Conductivity

C-21
User Manual

C-22
 User Manual

Appendix D Reagent reference consumption

Reagent dosage of the Analyzer

Quantity of Detergent
Operations comments Sample volume
sheath liquid consumption
Focusing (one time) 8mL±0.1mL 36mL±1mL 20mL±1mL
Calibration (one time) 27mL±1mL 110mL±1mL 70mL±1mL
Negative/positive QC (sediment) 8mL±0.1mL 12mL±1mL 20mL±1mL
Negative/positive QC (only chemistry analysis,
1.5mL±0.1mL / 3 mL±0.1mL
no refractometer method or conductance)
Negative/positive QC (only chemistry analysis,
1.5mL±0.1mL / 3 mL±0.1mL
no refractometer method)
Negative/positive QC (only chemistry analysis,
1.2±0.1mL / 3 mL±0.1mL
no refractometer method)
Per sample dosage (only chemistry analysis, no
1.5mL±0.1mL / 3 mL±0.1mL
refractometer method or conductance)
Per sample dosage (only chemistry analysis, no
1.5mL±0.1mL / 3 mL±0.1mL
refractometer method)
Per sample dosage (only chemistry analysis, no
1.2±0.1mL / 3 mL±0.1mL
refractometer method)
Per sample dosage (only test sediment) 3mL±0.1mL 11mL±1mL 7 mL±1mL
Per sample dosage (test all) 3mL±0.1mL 11 mL±1mL 7 mL±1mL
RESET 0mL 6 mL±1mL 7 mL±1mL
Clean flow cell 1.0mL±0.1mL 20mL±1mL 7 mL±1mL
Clean refractometer 3mL±0.1mL / 20mL±1mL
Clean pipelines 5 mL±0.1mL / 20mL±1mL
Blank (one time) 0mL 12mL±1mL 10mL±1mL
Focusing+blank (one time) 8mL±0.1mL 44mL±1mL 28mL±1mL
Fill pipeline 0mL 55mL±1mL 40mL±1mL

Notes:
● There shall be 4mL calibration liquid in the test tube; do not pour the used solution back to the
calibration liquid bottle.
● There shall be at least 8mL focusing solution and 4mL QC solution.

D-1
User Manual

D-2
 User Manual

Appendix E Letter of Guarantee

Dear user,
Thanks for using Urinalysis Hybrid (model: FUS-3000Plus). Our company will offer the following services:
(1)Technical consultation at any time
(2)One-year free warranty for the complete machine from the date of purchase; and
(3)Paid services in the following cases:
a)The product out of warranty
b)Product damage due to an accident or improper use
c)Product damage due to non-compliance with the instructions or repair without permission
With the development of technologies, the company will also provide update service of the Analyzer.

Please contact us according to the following information:

After-sales Service Unit: Dirui Industrial Co., Ltd.
Address: 3333Yiju Road, New & High Tech. Development Zone, Changchun Post Code: 130103
International Customer Service Hotline: +86 400 808 7597
International Customer Service E-mail: service@dirui.com.cn
Domestic Customer Service Hotline: 400 811 6695 400 811 6605
Domestic Fax: 0431-85100405
Domestic Customer Service E-mail: service.ch@dirui.com.cn

E-1
User Manual

E-2
 User Manual

Appendix F Performance indexes

F.1 Detection limit of visible components
The Analyzer is able to measure cell samples with concentration of 5pcs/μL.
F.2 Repeatability
F.2.1 Repeatability of visible components test
Coefficient of variation for counting result of visible components shall meet the requirements in Table F-2-1:
Table F-2-1 Requirements on Repeatability of Visible Components Test

Name of visible Coefficient of variation (CV, %)

component Concentration Requirements
50 pcs./μL ≤15.0%
cell
200 pcs./μL ≤8.0%

F.2.2 Repeatability of chemistry test

Coefficient of variation for reflectivity test result of the Analyzer is ≤1.0%
F.2.3 Repeatability of turbidity
Coefficient of variation for turbidity test result of the Analyzer is ≤5.0%.
F.2.4 Repeatability of conductivity
Coefficient of variation for conductivity test result of the Analyzer is ≤5.0%
F.3 Recognition rate of urine sediment test
F.3.1 Agreement percent between single result and microscopy result
The Analyzer shall at least identify the following items automatically, and the agreement percent between single
result and microscopy result shall meet requirements in Table F-3-1.
Table F-3-1 Requirements on Agreement Percent between Single Result and Microscopy Result

Name of visible component Agreement percent

red blood cell ≥70.0%
White blood cell ≥80.0%
Tube type ≥50.0%

F.3.2 False negative rate

False negative rate of testing result of the Analyzer is ≤3.0%.
F.4 Stability
F.4.1 Stability of visible components test
Within 8h after startup of the Analyzer, the coefficient of variation for counting results of cells shall be ≤8.0%.
F.4.2 Stability of Chemistry test
Within 8h after start of the Analyzer, coefficient of variationfor reflectivity test result shall be ≤1.0%.
F.4.3 Stability of turbidity
Within 8h after start of the Analyzer, coefficient of variation for turbidity test result shall be ≤5.0%.
F.4.4 Stability of conductivity
Within 8h after start of the Analyzer, coefficient of variation for conductivity test result shall be ≤5.0%.
F.5 Carry-over rate
F.5.1 Carry-over rate of visible components test

F-1
 User Manual

Carry-over rate of the Analyzer for cells shall be ≤0.05%.

F.5.2 Carry-over rate of Chemistry test
Positive samples of maximum concentration results of items excluding urinary bile, pH, specific gravity, vitamin
C, microalbumin, creatinine, urinary calcium, color, turbidity and electrical conductivity are tested, and then the
negative samples are tested. The negative samples shall not be positive.
F.6 Accuracy
F.6.1 Accuracy of applicable urine reagent strip
The difference between test result and marked value of corresponding reference solution shall not exceed an order
of magnitude, and reversed difference shall not appear. Positive reference solution shall not be negative, while
negative reference solution shall not be positive.
F.6.2 Accuracy of color test
Use color standard solution to test the Analyzer and the test result shall conform to the marks of color standard
solution.
F.6.3 Accuracy of turbidity
Use turbidity standard solution to test the Analyzer and the test result accuracy shall have deviation of ≤±10%.
F.6.4 Accuracy of conductivity
Use KCl conductivity solution standard substance to test the Analyzer and the test result accuracy deviation shall
as below:
Table F-6-2 Requirements of Conductivity Test Accuracy

Concentration Accuracy Deviation

(20±5)mS/cm ≤±10%
(55±5)mS/cm ≤±15%

F.6.5 Accuracy of specific gravity test

Use specific gravity calibration liquid to test the Analyzer and the test result accuracy deviation shall as below:
Table F-6-3 Requirements of Specific Gravity Test Accuracy

Concentration Accuracy Deviation

1.020±0.005 ±0.002
1.040±0.005 ±0.004

F-2
 User Manual

Appendix G Parts List

Parts List (including parts, accessories and consumables)
Replacement Replacing
Part Name Location Remarks
period method
Please contact This part can be
Sample-aspirating
Probe unit 5 years customer service checked/replaced by the
probe
staff. manufacturer/agency only.
Please contact This part can be
Syringe pump Syringe pump unit 12 months customer service checked/replaced by the
staff. manufacturer/agency only.
Please contact This part can be
Plastic bearing Probe unit 2 years customer service checked/replaced by the
staff. manufacturer/agency only.
Please contact This part can be
Strip-conveying
Strip table 2 years customer service checked/replaced by the
unit
staff. manufacturer/agency only.
Please contact This part can be
Soft rope Probe unit 2 years customer service checked/replaced by the
staff. manufacturer/agency only.
Please contact This part can be
Sheath liquid
Filter assembly 6 Months customer service checked/replaced by the
pipeline
staff. manufacturer/agency only.
Appropriate
Strip card Complete machine 4.8
time
Appropriate
Sheath liquid card Complete machine 4.9
time
Sample Appropriate
Glass test tube 5.1.1/5.1.2
feedingunit time
Please contact This part can be
Sheath liquid Appropriate
T-Connector Y420-1 customer service checked/replaced by the
pipeline time
staff. manufacturer/agency only.
Complete Please contact This part can be
Silicone Tube Appropriate
machinepipe customer service checked/replaced by the
Connector1 time
connector staff. manufacturer/agency only.
Please contact This part can be
Appropriate
Tube14 Pump assembly customer service checked/replaced by the
time
staff. manufacturer/agency only.
Please contact This part can be
Appropriate
Tube 20 Pump assembly customer service checked/replaced by the
time
staff. manufacturer/agency only.
Please contact This part can be
Appropriate
Tube 32 Pump assembly customer service checked/replaced by the
time
staff. manufacturer/agency only.
Please contact This part can be
Rinsing bath Appropriate
Tube 33 customer service checked/replaced by the
assembly time
staff. manufacturer/agency only.
Complete Please contact This part can be
Appropriate
Tube 45 machineexternal customer service checked/replaced by the
time
waste liquid tube staff. manufacturer/agency only.
Please contact This part can be
Rinsing bath Appropriate
Tube 53 customer service checked/replaced by the
assembly time
staff. manufacturer/agency only.
Please contact This part can be
Appropriate
Value Connector Pump assembly customer service checked/replaced by the
time
staff. manufacturer/agency only.
Handheld barcode Sample feeding Appropriate
2.3.1
reader unit time
Appropriate
Strip Strip-selecting unit
time
Urine sediment
Sample feeding
disposable special test Disposable
unit
tube

G-1
User Manual

G-2
 User Manual

Appendix H Statements on electromagnetic compatibility

The Analyzer shall comply with IEC 61326-1 and IEC 61326-2-6. See Table H-1 for requirements on immunity
and Table H-2 for requirements on emission.
Table H-1 Requirements of Electromagnetic Compatibility and Immunity Test

Standard requirements

EMC Applicable Performance

Port Test item Test value
standard or not criterion

Electrostatic Air discharge: 2kV, 4kV, 8kV

IEC 61000-4-2 Applicable B
Discharges (ESD) Contact discharge: 2kV, 4kV
Radiated
3V/m, 80MHz~2.0GHz,
Housing electromagnetic IEC 61000-4-3 Applicable A
80%AM
fields
Rated
power-frequency IEC 61000-4-8 3A/m, 50Hz Applicable A
magnetic field
0% for 1 cycle; B
Voltage sag IEC 61000-4-11 40% for 5/6 cycles; Applicable B
70% for 25/30 cycles C
Voltage
IEC 61000-4-11 5%, duration: 250/300 cycles Applicable C
interruption

AC
Pulse train IEC 61000-4-4 1kV(5/50ns, 5kHz) Applicable B
supplies

Line to ground: 2kV/line to line:

Surge IEC 61000-4-5 Applicable B
1kV

Radio-frequency
IEC 61000-4-6 3V, 150kHz~80MHz, 80%AM Applicable A
conduction

Pulse train IEC 61000-4-4 1kV(5/50ns, 5kHz) Non --

DC Power Line to ground: 2kV/line to

Surge IEC 61000-4-5 Non --
Supply ground: 1kV

Radio-frequency
IEC 61000-4-6 3V, 150kHz~80MHz, 80%AM Non --
conduction

Pulse train IEC 61000-4-4 0.5kV(5/50ns, 5kHz) Non --

I/O signal Surge IEC 61000-4-5 None. Non --

Radio-frequency
IEC 61000-4-6 3V, 150kHz~80MHz, 80%AM Applicable A
conduction

Pulse train IEC 61000-4-4 1kV(5/50ns, 5kHz) Non --

I/O signal
to main Surge IEC 61000-4-5 None. Non --
power
Radio-frequency
IEC 61000-4-6 3V, 150kHz~80MHz, 80%AM Non --
conduction

H-1
 User Manual

Table H-2 Emission Test Items & Requirements

Applicable or
Test Items EMC standard Test value
not
Pst value is not greater than 1.0; Plt value is not greater
than 0.65; duration for d(t) value exceeding 3.3% in
Voltage
voltage change period is no longer than 500ms; change
fluctuation and IEC 61000-3-3 No
of relative steady-state voltage (dc) does not exceed
flicker
3.3%; and relative maximum voltage change (dmax)
does not exceed 6%.
Harmonic current It is 1.5 times of the limit value specified in Table 1 of
IEC 61000-3-2 No
emission in IEC 61000-3-2.
electromagnetic It meets the requirements on limit value of IEC/CISPR
IEC/CISPR 11 Yes
disturbance 11 Type A, Group I

Statement on electromagnetic compatibility:

● The manufacturer is responsible for providing the consumer/user with the information of electromagnetic
compatibility of the equipment.
● The user is responsible for guaranteeing the environment for electromagnetic compatibility of the
equipment so that it can work normally.
● The equipment meets the specified requirements on emission and immunity in IEC 61326.
● The equipment is designed and tested according to Class A equipment in IEC/CISPR 11.In home
environment, the equipment may cause radio interference, thus preventive measures should be taken.
● It is recommended to evaluate electromagnetic environment before using the equipment.
● It is forbidden to use the equipment beside any source of intense radiation, or it may interfere with
normal operation of the equipment.

H-2